JP2020151558A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of more stably executing control of a drive object.SOLUTION: When first movable means and second movable means are displaced and moved on display surfaces between mutually approaching approach positions and mutually separating separation positions, it is determined whether arrangement of a predetermined display surface toward a front side of a game machine is difficult in the approach positions in halfway positions, and correction control is executed when the arrangement is difficult, thus stably executing control of the first movable means and the second movable means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game machine that executes a game effect by driving a plurality of driving objects and joining them to each other has been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-200382

In this type of gaming machine, when a plurality of driven objects are joined at a predetermined position, there is a problem that it is difficult to join the driven objects at a predetermined position due to a deviation in the position where the driven objects are started to be driven.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of more stably controlling a driven object.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured to be movable at least in a direction in which the first movable means is movable and a direction in which the first movable means is approached and a direction in which the first movable means is separated from the first movable means. It has a second movable means, and at least a movable control means for movably controlling between an approaching position in which the first movable means and the second movable means are close to each other and a separation position in which the second movable means is separated from each other. The movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means approaches the approach. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to a position, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced so that predetermined display surfaces are positioned on the front side of each other at the approaching position. It is controlled, and when the movable control means moves in the approaching position direction and the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions, the first movable means and the said The position determining means for determining whether the second movable means can reach the approaching position with the predetermined display surface positioned on the front side, and the position determining means cannot reach the approaching position. It has a correction control means for executing a correction movable control for correcting the movable control means so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side at the approaching position when the determination is made.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means from the separated position to a predetermined position is provided. The arranged displacement restricting region and the displacement allowable region that allows displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means are set, and the positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced, respectively. Is provided in the displacement allowable region.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the correction movable control causes the first movable means and the second movable means to move toward each other in the approaching position direction. After interrupting, the first movable means and the second movable means are displaced at the approaching position until the predetermined display surface is located on the front side, and then the correction is completed. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the same movable control as the movable control of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in a direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other.

The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done.

In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable. Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board before the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are driven, and (b) is a direction in which the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body approach each other. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of a game board in a driven state, and (c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a game board in a state where the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are driven to the position closest to each other. (A) is a diagram showing a display surface formed when the A surfaces of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are closest to each other, and (b) is a view showing the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body. It is a figure which showed the display surface which is formed when the B planes are closest to each other, and (c) is the display which is formed when the C planes of an upper rotation drive body and a lower rotation drive body are closest to each other. It is a figure which showed the surface, (d) is the figure which showed the display surface formed when the D surface of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body is the closest to each other. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive scenario table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive origin scenario table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive origin scenario table. It is the figure which showed the content of the scenario table schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the content of the vertical drive origin scenario table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a rotation drive correction scenario table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a vertical drive scenario table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a motor scenario table (rotational drive), (b) is a diagram schematically showing a motor scenario table (vertical drive), and (c) is a diagram schematically showing a motor. It is the figure which showed the spec setting table (rotational drive) schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the motor spec setting table (vertical drive) schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the correction operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drive correction processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the motor output processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the structure of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a left shaft support of the upper rotation drive body in the second embodiment, and (b) is a detailed configuration of a detection piece of the upper rotation drive body in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the correction scenario table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the corrected rotation drive scenario table 1 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the corrected rotation drive scenario table 2 in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the content of the correction rotation drive scenario table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the background of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball is likely to enter the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of jackpots of the special symbol, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). Further, in "big hit A" and "big hit B", in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the big hit is different from each other. Specifically, "big hit A" is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the next big hit of the special symbol, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is further increased, and "big hit B" is the big hit. From the end to the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than during the time saving. .. Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

In addition, when the special symbol becomes a jackpot and shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (book) after the jackpot of the special symbol ends. In the embodiment, it is continued until the end (100 times). On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if a new special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the lottery for the specified number of special symbols, the process returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. , The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”), a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs, and a third symbol display. An upper rotation drive body 900 and a lower rotation drive body 910 arranged on the front surface side of the device 81 are provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged on the front side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 4, 5, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbol combination (in the present embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first entry port 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 responds to the variation display of the first symbol display device 37 with the third symbol. Fluctuation display is performed.

Further, the configuration of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. As shown in FIG. 2, normally, the upper rotation drive body 900 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81 so as to overlap the back side of the center frame 86. Further, the lower rotation drive body 910 is usually arranged downward so that the area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is minimized. Although the details will be described later, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to be vertically driveable (movable), and further, each is configured to be rotatable.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotate about the vertical direction of the game machine, the upper rotation drive body 900 descends, and the lower rotation drive body 910 Rise. Then, they come into contact with each other (contact) with their predetermined surfaces (predetermined by the fluctuation pattern) facing the front side. Here, "contact" means that the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other, a slight gap is formed on each display surface. The contacting positions are driven to close positions. Of course, the display surfaces may be configured to be in contact with each other. By contacting each other, as shown in FIG. 6, the player is notified of a predetermined notification mode (in the example of FIG. 6, the character "chance" is displayed). In addition, when they are close to each other, the display surfaces may be aligned (fused) so that the displayed contents can be identified.

The configuration of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 7. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the upper rotation drive body 900, the description of the lower rotation drive body 910 will be omitted for the same configuration as the description.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper rotation drive body 900 has a box-shaped display surface composed of a rectangular parallelepiped having A surface 900a, B surface 900b, C surface 900c, and D surface 900d. The upper rotation drive body 900 is rotatably supported by a right shaft support 900R provided on the right side 900e and a left shaft support 900L provided on the left side 900f. The right shaft support 900R is formed by forming a right cylindrical portion 900Ra which is formed in a cylindrical shape and is configured to be fitted with a shaft portion protruding from the right surface 900e, which will be described later, and a right cylindrical portion protruding to the right from the right end portion of the cylindrical portion. It is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped right protruding piece 900Rb. Similarly, the left shaft display portion 900L is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is configured to fit with a shaft portion protruding from the left side direction 900f, which will be described later, and a left cylindrical portion 900La and a left end portion of the cylindrical portion to the left. It is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped left projecting piece 900Lb formed by projecting.

From the right side 900e, a shaft portion (not shown) configured to be inscribed with the right shaft branch 900R is provided so as to project. Further, from the left side 900f, a shaft portion (not shown) configured to be inscribed with the left shaft support portion 900L is provided so as to project.

Further, an upper rotation drive gear 901, which is a pinion gear for rotation, is provided so as to project from the right side 900e. Further, the right shaft branch 900R is provided with an upper rotation motor 903 which is a stepping motor for rotation drive, and the upper rotation motor 903 is provided with an upper rotation gear 902 that fits with the upper rotation drive gear 901. Has been done. The upper rotation motor 903 operates and the upper rotation gear 902 rotates to rotate the upper rotation drive gear 901 and rotate the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900.

Further, the right protruding piece 900Ra of the right shaft branch 900R is provided with an upper drive motor 905 which is a stepping motor for vertical drive. The upper drive motor 905 is provided with a vertical drive gear 906, which is a pinion gear that fits with the vertical drive rack 990. On the right rear side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 move up and down, respectively, but gears that fit with the vertical drive gears 906 and 916, respectively. The rack having the portions is arranged in the vertical direction longer than the moving stroke of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910.

At the rear of the left end portion of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, a support column 991 provided with a groove for preventing slippage is provided longer than the vertical drive stroke. A support column 991 can be inserted into the left protruding pieces 900Lb and 910Lb of the left shaft support 900L and 910L of the upper rotation driving body 900 and the lower rotation driving body 910.

By inserting the support column 991 through the left shaft support 900L in this way, the upper rotation drive body 900 can be smoothly driven up and down. Further, the vibration of the upper rotation drive body 900 can be suppressed. Further, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 can rotate smoothly because it is pivotally supported by the shaft portion inscribed in the right side shaft support 900R and the left side shaft support 900L. Further, the vibration of the upper rotation drive body 900 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the right shaft support 900R is provided with an upper rotation sensor 908 which is a reflective sensor for detecting the origin position of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900. A detection piece 907 detected by the upper rotation sensor 908 is projected on the right side surface 900e. Further, a detection piece 904 for detecting the upper drive sensor 920 (see FIG. 8) is provided so as to project above the right end portion of the right protruding piece 900Ra of the right shaft support portion 900R. The detection piece 904 is for detecting the origin position by the upper drive sensor 920 (see FIG. 8) for detecting the origin position in the vertical direction of the upper rotation drive body 900.

8 (a) to 8 (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board cut from the right side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, and the cross section thereof viewed from the right side. As shown in FIG. 8A, a drive base body 800 for fixing the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 to the back side of the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the game board 13. ing. The drive base body 800 is made of a resin such as polycarbonate, has a frame shape having an opening communicating with the opening of the game board 13, and is fixed to the back side so as to cover the opening of the game board 13. ing. A support column 991 and a rack 990 are fixed to the drive base 800, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are held so as to be vertically movable. A third symbol display device 81 is attached to the back side of the back base body 800.

FIG. 8A shows a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 800 are arranged above and below the third symbol display device 81, which are the positions when they are stored in the normal state, respectively. It is a figure shown. At the time of storage, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stored so that the A surfaces 900a and 910a face the front side, respectively.

In the drive base body 800, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven from each other from the storage position (origin position), decorative frames 801, 802 for decorating the storage position have a frame shape. It is provided. With the decorative frames 801, 802, even when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven from the storage position, the design of the vacant area can be improved.

When the position is in the stowed position shown in FIG. 8A, the rotation of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is regulated by the decorative frames 801 and 802, respectively, on the back side thereof. The region where the rotation of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is regulated by the decorative frames 801, 802 is referred to as a rotation regulation region. Further, a region in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 approach each other and enter each other's rotation region is also a rotation regulation region.

With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates during storage, and when driving, the surface on which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are set. It is possible to prevent a problem that makes it difficult for each other to come into contact with each other.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven to a position where they do not come into contact with the decorative frames 801, 802 and start to rotate. .. The region excluding the rotation restricting region does not come into contact with the upper rotation driving body 900 and the lower rotation driving body 910 as a rotation allowable region.

FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other. In the present embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other, the same surfaces (for example, C surfaces) of the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are used. ) Is driven so as to be located on the front side. The details of this drive control will be described later. In the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to approach each other at the same speed and come into contact with each other, but they approach each other at different speeds and have different movement amounts. Of course, it may be configured to be in contact with. With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven in various ways.

9 (a) to 9 (d) are views showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other. FIG. 9A shows a state in which the A surface 900a of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the A surface 910a of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). The state where the D surface 900d of the display surface of the above and the B surface 910b of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) is shown. In this state, the player is notified of the "☆" symbol. Here, the symbol "☆" indicates the degree of expectation (expected value) for the player to win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9B shows a state in which the B surface 900b of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the B surface 910b of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). The state where the A surface 900a of the display surface of the above and the C surface 910c of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) is shown. In this state, the player is notified of the "?" Symbol. Here, the symbol "?" Indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9C shows a state in which the C surface 900c of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the C surface 910c of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). A state in which the B surface 900b of the display surface and the D surface 910d of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) are shown. In this state, the player is notified of the character "chance". Here, the character "chance" indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9D shows a state in which the D surface 900d of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the D surface 910d of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). A state in which the C surface 900c of the display surface and the A surface 910a of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) are shown. In this state, the player is notified of the symbol "Δ". Here, the symbol of "Δ" indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

In this way, the expected value (probability of winning) that the special symbol (first symbol) is hit is set for each of the symbols and characters shown by the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively. , "Chance" character notification is more likely to be selected in the case of the most hit than "☆", "△", "?", Then in the order of "☆", "△", "?" The probability of being selected in the case of hitting is set high. Therefore, the player can have different expectations for the lottery result depending on the notification content notified by the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the first entry port 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is three times or less, or five times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is caused by the turning on of the first entry opening switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (a jackpot of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16 in this embodiment)), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64, for example. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "7,107,282" are special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol becoming the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), it returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. When this is done, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12B, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the fluctuation display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and another storage area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 17 and S405 in FIG. 19). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 21).

The time saving / medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot B is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot (this). In the embodiment, 100) is set. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit B is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 17). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 17).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

When the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the values match each other, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

Therefore, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the result is obtained by comparing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the execution area with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Therefore, if no matching value is found, the processing will take a long time. If no matching value is found and the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment) is out of order, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the stop type selection table as a process of determining the stop type at the time of the out-of-order. Since the process of comparing with the random value is performed, it takes more time for the process. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is a random number value that becomes a "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the same reach. After the occurrence, a process is performed in which the final stop symbol is compared with a random value that is "reach other than front and back" that stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and a random value that is "completely out of reach" that does not cause reach.

Further, the MPU 201 provided in the main control device 110 usually uses an 8-bit MPU in order to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, but the 8-bit MPU is used to generate 2 bytes. It takes a lot of processing time to compare the values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning of the ball into the first entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Specifically, the first ball entry switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the first ball entry port 64 is turned off in the timer interrupt process of 1 (the first timer interrupt process). Is detected, the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) detects that the first ball entry switch is on, and the subsequent timer interrupt process (third timer interrupt process). When it is detected that the first ball entry switch is on, it is detected that the ball has been won in the first ball entry port 64. As a result, when the output of the first ball entry switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of winning a ball. In this way, the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the winning to the first entry port 64 is detected by a certain timer interrupt process, the next In the timer interrupt process of, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is never detected. Therefore, among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the start prize is not detected in both of the two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and an upper rotation drive body. It controls the output of drive control data between the 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the fluctuation effect (variation display), and the like. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, an upper rotation motor 903, a lower rotation motor 913, an upper drive motor 905, and a lower drive motor 915. , Upper rotation sensor 908, lower rotation sensor 918, upper drive sensor 920, lower drive sensor 930, and the like are connected to each other.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a rotation drive scenario table 222a, a rotation drive origin scenario table 222b, a rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, a vertical drive scenario table 222d, a vertical drive origin scenario table 222e, and a vertical drive correction scenario table 222f. At least a motor scenario table 222g and a motor spec setting table 222h are provided.

The rotation drive scenario table 222a is a data table in which drive control data of the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 is set. The rotation drive scenario table 222a is executed when the operation timings of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 set in advance in the fluctuation pattern are reached. As shown in FIG. 13A, the time set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a sets the drive time of each operation scenario after the operation timing is reached. The sensor data indicates that, when set to ON, the upper rotation sensor 908 or the lower rotation sensor 918 is set to operate until it is turned ON. The number of steps indicates the value of the step counter 223j for stopping the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913. The speed is set to operate the stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913.

In the present embodiment, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms, and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms, and the speed is 3. In the case of, the speed at which the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms, and when the speed is 4, the speed at which the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. That is, speed 1 is set at the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 speed of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1 / of speed 1. The speed is 4. Note that speed 0 indicates a stop.

The direction indicates the direction in which the motor is rotated, the forward direction is the direction in which the excitation counter 223h is added and updated, and the reverse direction is the direction in which the excitation counter 223h is subtracted and updated. Rotate. Direction 0 indicates that the motor is stopped.

Here, when the operation timing of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 set in the fluctuation pattern is reached, an operation scenario corresponding to a time of 1000 ms is set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a. Since the number of steps 0, the speed 0, and the direction 0 are set for 1000 ms, it is shown that the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 910 are stopped for 1000 ms. When the time of 1000 ms elapses, the next operation scenario is set. In the next operation scenario, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 903 are set in the forward direction at a speed of 1 until the step counter 223j reaches 150 during 3000 ms. Rotate the rotary motor 913. When the step counter 223j is rotated until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 150 during 3000 ms, the operation flag 223o is set to ON, and the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 stand by in a stopped state. In the present embodiment, the time required to drive the step counters 0 to 150 to speed 1 is set to 3000 ms.

Next, when 3000 ms elapses, the next operation scenario is set, and the step counter 150 waits for 2000 ms. When 2000 ms has elapsed and the next operation scenario is set, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 2 until the value of the step counter becomes 0. When the value of the step counter is 0, both the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in a state where the A surfaces 900a and 910a are positioned in the front as shown in FIG. 7, and the value of the step counter. When is 150, both the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in a state where the C surfaces 900c and 910c are located on the front side as shown in FIG.

That is, in the rotation drive scenario table 222a, the A-side 900a and 910a are kept on the front side for 1000 ms, and the C-side 900c and 910c are rotated for 3000 ms until they are on the front side. After that, the state is maintained for 2000 ms and rotated in the opposite direction at 6000 ms to drive the A-sides 900a and 910a to the front side.

The rotary drive origin scenario table 222b sets the origin positions of the upper rotary motor 903 and the lower rotary motor 913 in the drive origin process (S1212) in the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is a data table in which drive control data is set. In this rotation drive origin scenario table, as shown in FIG. 13B, after waiting for 5000 ms, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor-918 are turned on at a speed of 4 for 3000 ms. Drive control is set to drive each in the opposite direction.

The rotation drive correction scenario table 222c is for correcting the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 when it is determined that they cannot come into contact with each other with the predetermined display surface facing the front. It is a data table in which the drive control data of is set. In this rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, as shown in FIG. 14A (until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 75, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 rotate at a speed of 1 in the forward direction. The value of the step counter 223j is 75. When the value of the step counter 223j is 180, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are normally positioned on the front side of the C surface 900c and 910c. It is a value in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other in this state.

The vertical drive scenario table 222d is a data table in which drive control data for driving the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are set. In this vertical drive scenario table 222d, the motor is driven in the positive direction at a speed of 1 until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 200 for 4000 ms, and after waiting for 1000 ms with the value of the step counter being 200, For 8000 ms, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 2 until the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on, respectively.

That is, in this vertical drive scenario table 222d, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven until they come into contact with each other (the position of the step counter 200 is set to contact each other), and in that state, 1000 ms. It waits and moves to the origin position over 8000 ms.

The vertical drive origin scenario table 222e sets the origin positions of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 in the drive origin process (S1212) in the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is a data table in which drive control data is set. In this vertical drive origin scenario table 222e, as shown in FIG. 13D, after driving at a speed of 4 in the positive direction until the value of the step counter reaches 25 for 5000 ms, the state is maintained for 3000 ms. Then, in 5000 ms, the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 4 until they are turned on. If the power supply is cut off during the origin setting operation and the power is turned on again, the operation is executed again from the first operation scenario of the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e.

The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is used to correct the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 when it is determined that they cannot come into contact with each other with the predetermined display surface facing the front. It is a data table in which the drive control data of is set. The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is executed in the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505) in the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 14B, the values of the step counter 223j in the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are stopped at the position of 180 for 8000 ms.

In this way, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven upward to see if they can be in contact with each other with the C surfaces 900c and 910c, which are predetermined display surfaces, facing the front side. The value of the motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 is determined at the position of 180. Then, when it is determined that the display surfaces come into contact with each other facing the front side, the correction control set by the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is executed. .. In this correction control, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven (moved) in the direction in which they are in contact with each other (approaching direction) for 8000 ms, and are stopped (stopped) during that time. The motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are driven to normal positions (step counter values). Therefore, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be brought into contact with each other with the normal display surface facing the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that different information is notified to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the motor scenario table 222g includes a rotation drive scenario table 222a and a vertical drive scenario table 222d corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main controller 110, respectively. It is a set data table. In the present embodiment, for the sake of simplification of the description, the rotation drive scenario table 222a and the vertical drive scenario table 222d are of one type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of scenario tables may be set. With this configuration, the display surface located on the front side can be changed or the operation patterns (speed, rotation speed, etc.) of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be changed according to the fluctuation pattern. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

As shown in FIGS. 15C and 15D, the motor spec setting table 222h is a data table in which the motor specifications of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 are set. Is. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 perform operations that are reversed from each other, but in this motor spec setting table 222h, the excitation data (exciting layer) corresponding to the excitation counter 223h is reversed. Since it is set, the same scenario can be used in common. As a result, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be controlled without having a dedicated scenario table, and the amount of data in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol hold ball number counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a fluctuation pattern storage area 223d, a scenario storage area 223e, a correction scenario storage area 223f, and excitation. At least a data storage area 223g, an excitation counter 223h, an excitation timer 223i, a step counter 223j, a motor number storage area 223k, a drive spec storage area 223m, a correction flag 223n, an operation flag 223o, and other storage areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1911 in FIG. 34). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. be able to. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223b is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2002 in FIG. 35). When the variation start flag 223b is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223c is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1908 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2006 in FIG. 35). When the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set as it is.

The variation pattern storage area 223d stores data of various variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern commands output from the main control device 110.

When the scenario storage area 223e receives the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation pattern includes an effect of driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. , Each scenario (rotational drive scenario table 222a, vertical drive scenario table 222c, etc.) selected from the motor scenario table 222g showing the driving contents of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is stored. It is a storage area. In this scenario storage area 223e, each scenario selected in the process of S1905 of the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set).

The correction scenario storage area 223f is a storage area in which the scenario is stored when the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c or the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is selected. In the correction scenario storage area 223f, each scenario selected in the process of S1706 of the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set).

The excitation data storage area 223g is the excitation data corresponding to the values of the excitation counters 223h corresponding to the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 (FIGS. 15 (c) and 15 (d)). Reference) is a storage area for storage. A storage area is set for each motor in the excitation data storage area 223g.

The excitation counter 223h is a counter for setting a layer for exciting each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915. The excitation counter 223h is a counter value updated in the range of 1 to 4, is updated to the maximum value of 4, and then is updated to the initial value of 1. As shown in FIGS. 15 (c) and 15 (d), the excitation counter 223h is provided with layers to be excited corresponding to each counter value.

The step counter 223j is a counter value for counting the number of steps of each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915.

The motor number storage area 223k is a storage area in which the number of stepping motors is stored. In the present embodiment, 4 which is the number of each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 is stored. In the motor number storage area 223k, the number of motors (4 in the present embodiment) is stored in the process of S1214 of the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, when a design change is made to change the number of motors by setting the number of motors, the drive control can be easily changed by changing the number stored in the number storage area 223k of the motors. be able to.

The drive spec storage area 223m is a storage area in which the spec information of each motor stored in the motor spec setting table 222h (see FIGS. 15C and 15D) is stored. In this drive spec storage area 223 m, motor spec information is stored in the process of S1213 of the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are joined, the correction flag 223n fronts a display surface different from a predetermined display surface (C surface 900c, 910c in this embodiment). It is a flag indicating that it is in a state of being joined. This correction flag 223n is set to off in the initial state (when the power is turned on, etc.), and in the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower side When the value of the step counter 223j with the rotary motor 913 is not the set value (75 in this embodiment), the process of S1704 is executed to set the value to ON. Further, when the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is a set value (75 in this embodiment), the process of S1703 is executed to set the value to off.

The operation flag 223o is a flag indicating that the operation of the operation scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223e has been completed. This operation flag 223o is set to off in the initial state (when the power is turned on, etc.), and is turned on in the process of S1511 of the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is set to. Further, in the processing of the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the setting time of the operation scenario of the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223e has elapsed, a new operation scenario has elapsed. After the operation scenario is stored, it is set to off in the processing of S1407. Further, in the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 on the voice lamp control device 113, it is set to off in the process of S1906.

The RAM 223 has an other storage area 223z, such as a command storage area for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 34) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 are already known and will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entry port 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. After executing the through-gate passage process (S107), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, it is a hit of 16 rounds, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation is set in which the determination of the jackpot of the special symbol is executed with high probability (S213). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215).

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If the above is the case (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (during a probabilistic gaming state) (S302). Here, it is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is set to on. The probability change flag is set to on when the jackpot A is set, and is set to off when the jackpot B is set.

When the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S302 that the game is in a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the pachinko machine 10 was acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the hit is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation of the special symbol is set), and the value is "60 to 99". If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short period of time for a normal symbol) (see FIG. 10 (a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 23). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry port 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 23) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the normal symbol hits, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, then when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 35, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1211). Next, the drive origin process for detecting and setting the origins of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is executed (S1212). In this drive origin process (S1212), the rotary drive origin scenario table 222b and the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e are stored in the scenario storage area 223e, respectively, and the origin detection process is executed. Specifically, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13D, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 each have a speed of 4 (every 4 ms) up to 25 steps in a time of 0 to 5000 ms. It is driven in the positive direction (direction approaching each other) at the speed of advancing one step. In the present embodiment, the region from 0 to 20 steps is set to the region where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are located within the range of the rotation regulation region, and the number of steps is more than that. In the region where the is driven, it will be located in the rotation allowable region. Therefore, the position where the 25 steps are driven becomes the rotation allowable region.

Next, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13 (d), the vertical drive drive is stopped at the position of 25 steps for 3000 ms, and during that time, the rotary drive scenario table of FIG. 13 (b) is stopped. As shown in 222b, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor 918 are rotated in opposite directions at a speed of 4 until they are turned on. After that, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13 (d), the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are separated from each other in the opposite direction (upper rotation drive body 900 and lower rotation drive body 910) until the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on. It is driven to speed 4 in the direction of movement). Then, the position where the upper rotation sensor 908, the lower rotation sensor 918, the upper drive sensor 920, and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on is set as the origin of each motor.

If a power failure occurs while the drive origin process (S1212) is being executed, the drive origin process (S1212) is executed again from the beginning. When the value of the step counter 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is stopped at the position 25, it is stopped at that position for 8000 ms. After that, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed.

After the drive origin processing (S1212) is executed, the spec information of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation drive motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 from the motor spec setting table 222h (in this embodiment, each of them). Information on the origin detection sensor corresponding to the motor and information on the step excitation data) are set in the drive spec storage area 223 m, respectively.

In this embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to set common drive data (rotation drive scenario table 222a, etc.), respectively. This motor spec setting table Since the order of the layers to be excited is set according to each motor by 222h, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 move up and down so as to approach each other by rotating in opposite directions. Even if there is, drive control can be performed with common drive data. Therefore, the data capacity of the drive data can be reduced, and the capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

Next, the number of motors (4 in this embodiment) is set in the motor number storage area 223k. Here, by configuring to set the number of motors, if the number of motors is changed in a similar game machine, etc., control is performed by simply changing the specifications so that the number of motors set here is changed. Can be easily matched. After this, the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, the processing of S1204 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1316 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1314. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1302 to S1314 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1316 and the variation display setting process of S1317 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1316 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1317 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is made, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expected value of the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, the time set in the scenario of the motor scenario (rotation drive scenario table 222a, vertical drive scenario table 222d, etc.) which is the drive data for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. A motor scenario process is performed to perform measurement (update) and execute a process of sequentially storing scenarios (drive data) in the scenario storage area 223e at the timing of shifting to the scenario set at the next time (S1311). The details of this motor scenario processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In the process of S1312, a motor command monitoring process for executing a process of driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 based on the drive data set in the motor scenario process (S1311) is performed (S1312). .. The details of this motor command monitoring process (S1312) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. After the motor command monitoring process (S1312) is executed, the drive correction process (S1313) is executed.

In the process of S1313, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven, it is determined whether or not they can be contacted at a predetermined contact surface, and if they cannot be contacted, the correction is performed. The drive correction process for executing the process is performed (S1313). The details of this drive correction process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After the drive correction process (S1313) is executed, the process of the motor output process (S1314) is executed.

In the process of S1314, the motor output process is performed in which the commands for executing the motor control set in the motor command monitoring process (S1312) and the drive correction process (S1313) are output to each motor (S1314). The details of this motor output process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After the motor output process (s1314) is executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1316.

In the process of S1316, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1316). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

After the command determination process (S1316), the variable display setting process is executed (S1317). In the variation display setting process (S1317), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the processing of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1320), and the power-off process is executed (S1321). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1322), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1318: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a motor scenario process (S1311), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this motor scenario processing (S1311). This motor scenario process (S1311) executes a process of setting drive data for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively.

In the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311), first, 1 is set in the variable [B] (S1401). This variable [B] is a variable for indicating which motor to set, and if the variable [B] is 1, the upper rotation motor 903, and if the variable [B] is 2, the lower If the rotary motor 913 and the variable [B] are 3, the upper drive motor 905 is set, and if the variable [B] is 4, the lower drive motor 915 is set.

Next, it is determined whether the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1402). If it is determined to be 4 or less (S1402: Yes), it is stored in the scenario storage area [B] (if the variable [B] is 1, the scenario storage area 1) in the scenario storage area 223e. It is determined whether the time of the scenario is the END time (S1403). If it is determined that it is not the END time (S1403: No), it is determined whether the time of the current scenario set in the scenario storage area [B] of the scenario storage area 223e is 0 (S1404). If it is determined that the scenario time is not 0 (S1404: No), the scenario time set in the scenario storage area [B] is subtracted by 1. The scenario time set in the scenario storage area [B] indicates the time set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A) or the like, and the rotation scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A). In FIG. 13 (a)), when this scenario table is set in the scenario storage table [B], first, a scenario corresponding to the time 1000 ms, which is the top scenario, is set, and S1405 from this time 1000 ms. The update is executed by subtracting 1 by 1 in the process of. After that, the process of S1408 is executed.

If it is determined that the time in the scenario storage area [B] is 0 (S1404: Yes), the next scenario in the scenario table set in the scenario storage area [B] is set in the scenario storage area [B]. It is set (S1406). The operation flag 223o is set to off (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time in the scenario storage area [B] is the END time (S1403), the process of S1408 is executed. In the process of S1408, a process of adding 1 to the value of the variable [B] is executed (S1408). After that, the process returns to S1402 again, the same process is repeatedly executed, and when the variable [B] is larger than 4 (that is, the update of the scenario for all the motors is completed) (S1402: No), this End the process.

Next, the motor command monitoring process (S1312), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. 28 to 30 are flowcharts showing the motor command monitoring process (S1312). This motor command monitoring process (S1312) issues a command for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 based on each scenario set in the process of the motor scenario process (FIGS. 27, S1311). Execute the process to set each.

In the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312), first, it is determined whether the time of the scenario table of all the scenario storage areas stored in the scenario storage area 223e and the correction scenario storage area 223f is the END time (S1501). ). When it is determined that the time of all the scenario tables is the END time (S1501: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the times in all the scenario tables are not the END times (S1501: No), the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1502). Note that this variable [B] is set to correspond to each motor in the same manner as described in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311). It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1503).

When the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1503: Yes), it is determined whether the variable [B] is 3 or 4 (that is, whether it is the upper drive motor 905 or the lower drive motor 915). (S1504). When it is determined that the variable [B] is 3 or 4 (S1504: Yes), it is determined whether the correction flag 223n is on (S1505). If it is determined that the correction flag 223n is on (S1505: Yes), the correction operation process is executed (S1506). On the other hand, when the variable [B] is not 3 or 4 (S1504: No), or when the correction flag 223n is off (S1505: No), the process of S1507 is executed.

In this way, when the variable [B] is 3 or 4, by determining whether the correction flag 223n is on, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are mutually described, although the details will be described later. When the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 move in the direction of contact and the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 reach a predetermined number of steps before the contact, the number of steps of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is the set value (this). In the embodiment, it is determined whether the state is different from 38), and if it is different, the correction operation process (S1506) for correcting it is executed. Therefore, based on the scenario table stored in the correction scenario storage area 223f, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven and corrected so as to be brought into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface. Therefore, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 comes into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface due to a cause such as when the drive is started from a state in which the A surfaces 900a and 910a are not stored in the storage position toward the front side. Even if a problem that cannot be caused occurs, it can be solved by correcting the problem. If the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are not stored with the A surfaces 900a and 910a facing the front when the lower rotation drive body 910 is stored, the processing of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not executed every 1 ms. When the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 receives a command (variation pattern command) for starting fluctuation of a new special symbol (third symbol) during driving due to a fall or the like, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates upward. This may occur when the rotary drive of the drive body 900 or the lower rotary drive body 910 is stopped and retracted. Further, it may occur when the rotation is not structurally driven normally and is stored.

In the process of S1507, the scenario stored in the scenario storage area [B] of the scenario storage area 223e is extracted (S1507). It is determined whether the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is on (S1508). If the operation flag 223o is on (S1508: Yes), the process of S1514 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation flag 223o is off (S1508: No), it is determined whether the stored scenario sensor data is off (S1509). When it is determined that the sensor data is off (S1509: Yes), it is determined whether the step counter [B] (the step counter of the motor corresponding to the variable [B]) is the step counter of the scenario in which it is stored. (S1510). When it is determined that the step counter [B] is the same as the step counter of the scenario (S1510: Yes), the operation flag 223o is set to ON (S1511). After that, the process proceeds to S1514. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step counter [B] does not match the step counter of the scenario (S1510: No), the process proceeds to S1514.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor data of the stored scenario is on (S1509: No), the motor sensor [B] (if the motor sensor 1, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the motor sensor 2 may be used. For example, it is determined whether the state of the upper drive sensor 920 for the lower rotation sensor 918 and the motor sensor 3 and the lower drive sensor 930 for the motor sensor 4) is ON (S1512). When it is determined that the state of the motor sensor [B] is on (S1512: Yes), the step counter [B] is set to 0, and the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is set to on (S1513). .. After that, the process proceeds to S1514.

In the process of S1514, the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is off, and it is determined whether the speed and rotation direction of the stored scenario are not 0 (S1514). When the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is off and it is determined that the speed and rotation direction of the stored scenario are 0 (S1514: Yes), the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i is set to 1. to add. Here, the excitation timer 223i is a timer for controlling the speed of each motor, and is a timer for counting how many cycles the motors are excited.

Here, since the motor command monitoring process (S1312) is executed every 1 ms, the maximum value of the speed of each motor is the speed at which the motor is excited and driven every 1 ms (corresponding to speed 1). The speed 2 set in the scenario drives the motor at half the speed of speed 1 by exciting the motor every 2 ms to drive the motor. Further, the speed 3 drives the motor at a speed of 1/3 of the speed 1 by exciting the motor every 3 ms. Further, the speed 4 drives the motor at a speed of 1/4 of the speed 1 by exciting the motor every 4 ms. The excitation timer 223i is used to execute a process of exciting the motor at intervals corresponding to a set speed.

It is determined whether the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i is the same as the speed set in the scenario (S1516). When it is determined that the speed setting is the same as that of the excitation timer [B] (S1516: Yes), the excitation timer [B] is set (reset) to 0 (S1517). On the other hand, when it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the speed setting do not match (S1516: No), the process proceeds to S1518.

In the process of S1518, it is determined whether the value of the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1518). If it is determined that the value of the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1518: Yes), the process proceeds to S1519. On the other hand, when it is determined that the speed or rotation direction of the scenario in which the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is on or stored is 0 (S1514: No), or the excitation timer [B] is determined to be non-zero. If this is done (S1518: No), the process of S1533 is executed.

In the process of S1519, it is determined whether the direction set in the scenario is the positive direction (S1519). When it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the positive direction (S1519: Yes), it is determined whether the step counter [B] is the same as the number of steps in the scenario (S1520). When it is determined that the step counter [B] is the same as the number of steps in the scenario (S1520: Yes), the step counter [B] is set to the number of steps in the scenario (S1521). On the other hand, when it is determined that the step counter [B] does not match the number of steps in the scenario (S1520: No), the step counter [B] is updated by adding 1 to the step counter [B] (S1522).

It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] of the excitation counter 223h is 4 or more (S1523). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is less than 4 (S1523: No), the excitation counter [B] is incremented by 1 (S1524). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1523: Yes), the excitation counter [B] is set to 1 (S1525).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the forward direction (S1519: No), it is determined whether the direction in the scenario is the opposite direction (S1526). If it is determined that the direction in the scenario is not the reverse direction (S1526: No), the process proceeds to S1533.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the opposite direction (S1526: Yes), the value of the step counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1528).

It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1530). If the value of the excitation counter [B] is not 1 (S1530: No), the excitation counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1531). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1530: Yes), the value of the excitation counter [B] is set to 4 (S1532). After that, the process proceeds to S1533.

In the process of S1533, it is determined whether the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is off and the sensor data in the scenario is on (S1533). When the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is off and the sensor data in the scenario is determined to be on (S1533: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the motor sensor [B] is on (S1533: Yes). S1534). When it is determined that the state of the motor sensor [B] is off (S1534: No), the data corresponding to the excitation counter [B] is set in the excitation data [B] (S1535).

In this way, when the sensor data is turned on in the scenario, the excitation data is set until the sensor corresponding to the motor sensor [B] is turned on, so that the sensor is reliably driven to the position where the sensor is turned on. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to return to the origin position without managing the number of steps and the like, and drive control can be easily performed.

When the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is turned on, the sensor data in the scenario is determined to be off (S1533: No), or the state of the motor sensor [B] is determined to be off. (S1534: Yes), the process of S1536 is executed. In the process of S1536, a process of adding 1 to the variable [B] is executed (S1536). After that, the process returns to the process of S1503, the iterative process is executed, and when it is determined in the process of S1503 that the variable [B] is larger than 4, this process is terminated (S1503: No).

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a correction operation process (S1506), which is one process in the motor command monitoring process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this correction operation monitoring process (S1506). This correction operation monitoring process (S1506) is a process for performing correction when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven and it is difficult to make contact with a predetermined contact surface. Will be executed.

In the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1506), first, the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1601). This variable [B] is for indicating a motor corresponding to the value of the variable [B] as well as the variable [B] used in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311).

It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is equal to or less than the number of motors (4 in this embodiment) (S1602). When it is determined that the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1602: Yes), the rotation drive correction which is the correction scenario stored in the correction scenario storage area [B] in the correction scenario storage area 223f. The scenario table 222c (see FIG. 14 (a)) and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14 (b)) are extracted. Here, the correction scenarios stored in the correction scenario storage area 223f are set in the processes of S1706 and S1707 of the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) described later, respectively.

1 is added to the value of the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i (S1604). It is determined whether the excitation timer [B] matches the operating speed in the correction scenario (S1605). When it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the operation speed in the correction scenario match (S1605: Yes), the excitation timer [B] is set to 0 (S1606). After that, the process proceeds to S1607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the operation speed in the correction scenario do not match (S1605: No), the process of S1607 is executed.

In the process of S1607, it is determined whether the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1607). When it is determined that the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the direction in the correction scenario is the positive direction (S1608). When it is determined that the direction in the correction scenario is the positive direction (S1608: Yes), the value of the step counter [B] is incremented by 1 (S1609). It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1610). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is less than 4 (S1610: No), 1 is added to the excitation counter [B] (S1611). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1610: Yes), the excitation counter [B] is set to 1.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is not the forward direction (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is the reverse direction (S1613). When it is determined that the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is the opposite direction (S1613: Yes), the step counter [B] is subtracted by 1. It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1615). When it is determined that the excitation counter [B] is not 1, (S1615: No), the excitation counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1617). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1615: Yes), the value of the excitation counter [B] is set to 4 (S1616). After the processes of S1611, S1612, S1616, and S1617 are executed, the process of S1602 is executed again, and the previous processes are repeated. If it is determined in the process of S1602 that the value of the variable [B] is a value larger than 4, (S1602: No), this process is terminated.

In this correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505), each motor is driven until the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 reaches 75. The maximum value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is set to 200, and when the maximum value is exceeded, the step counter 223j is set to 1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a drive correction process (S1313), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this drive correction process (S1313). This drive correction process (S1313) determines whether the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven and come into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface, and if they cannot make contact, it is determined. Execute the process for setting the correction scenario for correction.

In the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313), first, it is determined whether the values of the step counters 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor are 180 (S1701). When it is determined that the value of the step counter 223j is 180 (S1701: Yes), the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is a set value (75 in this embodiment). Is determined.

Here, the position where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven in the contact direction and the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive bodies 910 hold a rotatable interval is the position where the value of the step counter 223j is 180. .. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured so that the value of the step counter 223j makes one revolution at 200, and when the step counter is rotated more than that, the step counter becomes 1. Normally, at the position where the step counter 223j is 180, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 is in a state where the boundary (corner) between the A surface 900a and the B surface 900b faces substantially vertically downward. On the other hand, in the lower rotation drive body 910, when the step counter 223j is at the position of 180, the boundary (corner) between the A surface 910a and the D surface 910d faces substantially vertically upward. From this state, while driving in the direction of contact for each of 20 steps, the upper rotation drive body 900 rotates the display surface so that the B surface 900b faces vertically downward (rotates by about 45 degrees), and drives the lower rotation. The body 910 is rotated (rotated by about 45 degrees) so that the display surface D surface 910d faces vertically upward, and the B surface 900b and the D surface 910d are brought into contact with each other facing each other. By bringing them into contact with each other in this way, the C surfaces 900c and 910c, which are set in advance to face the front when they come into contact with each other, stop in a state of facing the front.

In this way, at the position of the step counter 180, the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 of each other's upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are set values (in this embodiment). By determining whether the value of the step counter 223j is 38), the surfaces (C surfaces 900c and 910c in the present embodiment) that have been set to face the front surface come into contact with each other so as to face the front surface. Can be determined in advance. Therefore, if there is a deviation and the desired surfaces cannot be brought into contact with each other with the desired surfaces facing the front, the correction can be set.

In the process of S1702, when the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is determined to be a set value (75 in this embodiment) (S1702: Yes), the correction flag 223n is turned off. Set (S1703). On the other hand, when the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913 is determined to be different from the set value (38 in this embodiment) (S1702: No), the correction flag 223o is set to ON (S1702: No). S1704). That is, the correction flag 223o is a flag indicating that it is difficult to bring the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 into contact with each other in predetermined display surfaces.

When it is determined that the correction flag 223o is on (S1705), the rotation drive correction scenario table (top) 222c (FIG. 14 (a)) is a correction scenario for the upper rotation motor 903 (upper rotation drive body 900). Correction) is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. The rotation drive correction scenario table (bottom) 222c, which is a correction scenario for the lower rotation motor 913 (lower rotation drive body 910), is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. It is set (stored) in each of the scenario storage areas 2 (S1706). The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14C), which is a common correction scenario for the upper drive motor 905 (upper rotation drive body 900) and the lower drive motor 915 (lower rotation drive body 910), is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. Each of the correction scenario storage areas 3 to 4 is set (stored) (S1707).

Here, when it is determined that the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 cannot be brought into contact with each other on a predetermined predetermined surface, the rotation drive correction is a correction scenario set to correct the contact. When the scenario table 222c (see FIG. 14 (a)) and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14 (c)) are set, they are set to be driven and corrected as follows. According to the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are stopped in the state of the step counter 180 as they are for 8000 ms. On the other hand, according to the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, the upper rotation motor 903 continues to rotate in the forward direction at a speed of 1 for 8000 ms until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 75. Similarly, the lower rotation motor 913 is rotated in the same manner as the upper rotation motor 903. Here, if only the other side is deviated, only the other side will be rotated.

With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be efficiently corrected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are rotated at the same speed for correction, but the correction is not limited to this, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are rotated at different speeds. It may be configured to allow. With this configuration, the deviation of the display surface between the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is eliminated, and when the step counters (75 in the present embodiment) of the set values are obtained, the correction flag 223o Is set to off and drive control is performed based on a normal set scenario to bring the preset display surfaces into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 rotate the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 once each when the value of the step counter 223j reaches 200. Then, when it is rotated further, the value of the step counter 223j is reset to 0, which is the initial value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a motor output process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this motor output process (S1314). This motor output process (S1314) is a motor command monitoring process (s) for the upper rotation motor 903 and the upper drive motor 905 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor 913 and the lower drive motor 915 of the lower rotation drive body 910. The process of outputting the drive data (excitation data) set in the process of FIG. 28, S1312) or the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505) is executed.

In the motor output process (FIG. 33b, S1314), first, the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1801). This variable [B] is for indicating the motor corresponding to the value of the variable [B] as well as the variable [B] used in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311). It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1802). The excitation data [B] stored in the excitation data storage area 223g is set in the motor [B] (S1803). Here, if the motor 1 is used, the upper rotation motor 903 is used, if the motor 2 is used, the lower rotation motor 913 is used, if the motor 3 is used, the upper drive motor 905 is used, and if the motor 4 is used, the lower drive motor 915 is used. Each corresponds.

1 is added to the variable [B] (S1804), the process returns to the process of S1802, and the process is repeated. In the process of S1802, when it is determined that the value of the variable [B] is a value larger than 4, this process ends. By updating the variable [B] in this way, the data set in the excitation data storage area 223g can be sequentially set for each motor. Therefore, each motor can be driven and controlled more reliably.

Next, the command determination process (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1316). This command determination process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1316), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903).

The received variation pattern type determines whether the motor drive (drive of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910) is set (S1904). As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, the motor scenario table 222g is used to determine whether or not the motor drive is set in advance for each variation pattern by the rotation drive scenario table 222a (FIG. 13 (a)). ), And the vertical drive scenario table 222d (see FIG. 13C) are set respectively.

When it is determined that the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern (S1904: Yes), the rotation drive scenario table 222a is selected from the motor scenario table 222g based on the received fluctuation pattern, and the scenario is stored. It is stored (stored) in the scenario storage areas 1 and 2 of the area 223e, respectively. Further, based on the received fluctuation pattern, the vertical drive scenario table 222d is selected from the motor scenario table 222g and stored (stored) in the scenario storage areas 3 to 4 of the scenario storage table 223e (S1905). The operation flag 223o is set to off (S1906).

In this way, when the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, each scenario is set, so that the third symbol set for the fluctuation pattern is set. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be easily driven according to the display contents displayed on the display device 81.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1908), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1908), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1910). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1910: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1911). Further, in the process of S1911, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. After the processing of S1911, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning prize is given. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1911. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1911 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1910, if the hold ball number command is not received (S1910: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1912).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation display setting process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1317). This variation display setting process (S1317) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 35, S1317), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2005 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2005). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2005: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S2005: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is turned off (S2006), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2007).

The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009. In the process of S2009, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). ..

In the present embodiment, the values of the step counters 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are at the position of 180, and the values of the step counters of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are set values (in this embodiment). , 75), but the determination is not limited to this, and the determination may be performed at any position, and the values of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 corresponding to each position are set and determined. It should be set as follows. Further, it is determined whether the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 correspond to the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913, respectively, multiple times. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to stably control the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player is notified on a display surface different from the setting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to switch the display surface for notifying the player by rotating, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the lower rotation drive body 910 is configured to be switched by another configuration. Of course it's okay. For example, one display surface may be configured by a liquid crystal display device without rotation, and the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals. Further, the shutter member may be movable at predetermined time intervals to switch the display surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotate at a speed of their choice and approach and separate from each other at the same speed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates with each other. It may be configured to change the speed and the speed of movement.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the rotation positions of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are deviated, the movement of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stopped and the rotation is corrected. However, it may be corrected so as to match by changing the movement speeds of each other or one of them.

In the present embodiment, the correction operation is performed as a dedicated operation and then returned to the normal operation. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and when the correction operation is performed, the time required for the correction operation is performed. By increasing the movement speed based on the above, even if the drive can be completed within the entire drive time set in the scenario table of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the drive of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 from becoming longer than the fluctuation time.

Next, another example of the first embodiment will be described. In the main process (FIG. 26), the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a display surface (upper rotation motor 903 and lower) facing the front side in the storage position of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. The value of the step counter with the rotation motor 913 or whether the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor 918 are set to ON) is determined. Then, when it is determined that the display surface is different from the normal state (in the present embodiment, the A surface does not face the front surface), the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven. Set so that it is easy to set.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, a motor scenario table 222g for correction is set separately from the normal motor scenario table, and is selected in response to a variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The ratio of the effect of driving and controlling the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is set to be larger than that of the normal motor scenario table 222g.

By setting in this way, even when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stored in the storage position with the display surface different from the normal state facing the front side, the speed is faster. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven so that the normal display surface can be stored facing the front surface. Therefore, since the display surface different from the normal state of the player is stored facing the front, it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player.

Regarding the drive control set in the motor scenario table 222g for correction, the display surface located on the front side when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other has the lowest expectation. ? ”. By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being frequently notified of the display surface having a high degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of expectation for an excessive jackpot.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 37. In the above-described first embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are respectively attached with the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915, respectively, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are attached. The case where the body 910 and the body 910 are driven up and down has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, L-shaped racks facing each other are provided on the left and right sides of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, and are fitted to each other. It was configured to arrange the motors that drive the gears. Further, it is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that sensors for detecting the origin position and the rotation position of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are provided respectively.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36, the right shaft branch 900R of the upper rotation drive body 900 in the second embodiment.
The upper drive motor 905 is not provided on the right protruding piece 900Rb. The right protruding piece 900Rb is formed in an L shape, and is composed of a rack that protrudes horizontally from the right cylindrical portion 900Ra and is bent at a right angle toward the lower rotation drive body 910 side to form a rack gear inward. ing. On the other hand, the lower drive motor 915 is not provided on the right protruding piece 910Ra of the right shaft support portion 910R of the lower rotation drive body 910. The right projecting piece 910Rb is composed of a rack that is L-shaped, projects horizontally from the right cylindrical portion 910Ra, is bent at a right angle toward the upper rotation drive body 900 side, and has a rack gear formed outward. ing. The rack gears of the right protruding piece 900Rb and the right protruding piece 910Rb are arranged so as to face each other, and a right drive gear 700 that fits with each other is arranged between them. The right drive gear 700 is rotated by a stepping motor which is a right drive motor.

Similarly, the left shaft branch 900L is also provided with a left protruding piece 900Rb and a left protruding piece 910Rb having the same configuration, and the right drive gear 710 is fitted and driven by the left drive motor. In this way, by driving (rotating) the right drive motor and the left drive motor in different directions at the same time, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are brought into contact with each other and separated from each other, respectively. It can be driven.

With this configuration, the weight of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be reduced, and the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be easily driven in synchronization with each other, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven vertically.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, a first sensor 900s and a second sensor 900t are provided on the left cylindrical portion 900La of the left shaft support portion 900L of the upper rotation drive body 900, respectively. The first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are composed of transmissive sensors, and are configured to be capable of detecting a detection piece 900n provided so as to project from the left side 900f of the upper rotation drive body 900. .. The first sensor 900s is provided vertically above the inside of the left cylindrical portion 900La, and the second sensor 900t is provided at a position on the front side of the game machine inside the left cylindrical portion 900La. The first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are provided at positions separated by about 1/4 lap.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the detection piece 900n has a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the left cylindrical portion 900La, and is driven upward by being inserted into the left cylindrical portion 900La. The display surface of the body 900 is rotatably supported. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the detection piece 900n has a cylindrical shape on the left side side 900f side, and a detection unit 900n1 is formed at the tip thereof so as to project about 1/4 of the circumference. Has been done. The detection piece 900n is arranged so as to project from the left side 900f so that the position where the first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are turned on is the position where the A side 900a faces the front side, that is, the origin. Further, depending on the state in which the first sensor 900s is on, the state in which only the second sensor 900t is on, and the state in which both the first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are off, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 It is configured so that it can be determined at which position. Further, the lower rotation drive body 910 is similarly configured.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment described above, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven to each other and the step counter 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 reaches a predetermined number of steps, A case has been described in which it is determined whether or not contact is possible on a predetermined contact surface, and if it is difficult to make contact, the correction is performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven, which display surface is the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910? It is determined whether the surface is stored with the surface facing the front side, and if the A surfaces 900a and 910a, which are the normal origin positions, are not stored with the surfaces facing the front side, a correction corresponding to the correction is made. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a scenario table is set and control for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the correction scenario selection table 222i is added to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10).

In the correction scenario selection table 222i, as shown in FIG. 39, 12 patterns of correction scenario patterns from 1 to 12 are set respectively. Each correction scenario pattern is a correction rotation drive scenario for the upper rotation drive body 900 by combining a display surface facing the front in the upper rotation drive body 900 and a display surface facing the front in the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively. A table and a correction rotation drive scenario table for the lower rotation drive body 910 are set respectively. As for the correction rotation drive scenario table, the correction rotation drive scenario tables 1 to 3 are stored in the correction scenario selection table 222i, respectively.

In the corrected rotation drive scenario 1 (see FIG. 40A), the upper rotation drive body 900 is stopped with the B surface 900b facing the front, or the lower rotation drive body 910 faces the D surface 910d to the front. It is selected when it is stopped in the state of. After stopping and waiting for 1500 ms after the start of driving the upper rotation drive body 900, the upper rotation drive body 900 is rotated at a speed of 1 in the forward direction until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 50 for 2500 ms. Set.

In this way, by making the standby time 500 ms longer than usual (rotation drive scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A) selected when the A side 900a and 910a are in the front), the B side 900b or the D side It can be corrected that the rotation starts from 910d.

Similarly, the correction rotation drive scenario 2 (see FIG. 40B) is selected when the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 is housed with the C surfaces 900c and 910c facing the front. .. In this correction rotation drive scenario 2, the standby time is set to be 1000 ms longer than usual, and it is possible to correct the rotation from the C surfaces 900c and 910c.

In the corrected rotation drive scenario 3 (see FIG. 40 (c)), the upper rotation drive body 900 is stopped with the D surface 900d facing the front, or the lower rotation drive body 910 faces the B surface 910b to the front. It is selected when it is stopped in the state of. In this correction rotation drive scenario 3, the standby time is set to be 1500 ms longer than usual, and it is possible to correct the rotation from the D surface 900c or the B surface 910b.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display surface can be rotated once in 2000 ms by driving the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913 at a speed of 1. Therefore, it is possible to rotate in 500 ms from one display surface to the next display surface. Therefore, if the display surface is deviated to the next surface, the other is to wait for 500 ms. It can be combined with the driving body of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display surface is configured to be adjusted normally by waiting according to the deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface may be set to be adjusted by changing the speed. Further, the vertical movement of both driving bodies may be made to stand by in the rotation allowable region for a predetermined period, and during that time, the driving bodies may be driven so as to align the positions of both display surfaces for correction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process (FIG. 41) of the third embodiment, the contents of the motor command monitoring process (S1312) and the command determination process (S1316) are changed from the main process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. The drive correction process (S1313) has been deleted. Since the other processes are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the motor command monitoring process (S1312), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this motor command monitoring process (S1312). In the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 42, S1312) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1504 to S1506 are deleted from the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 42, S1312) of the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S1316), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1316). In the command determination process (FIG. 43, S1316) of the third embodiment, each process from S1920 to S1921 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) of the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern (S1904: Yes), the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor of the lower rotation drive body 900. It is determined whether the step counter 223j with the 913 has a normal value (in the present embodiment, the values of the step counters 223j are 0 each other) (S1920). When it is determined that the step counters 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 have normal values, the process of S1905 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not normal (S1920: No), the vertical drive scenario table 222e is set in the scenario storage areas 3 to 4 of the scenario storage area 223e from the motor scenario table 222g based on the fluctuation pattern (memory). ). Further, based on the values of the step counters 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor 913 of the lower rotation drive body 910, the display surfaces facing the front side are determined respectively, and the correction scenario The rotation drive scenario table is selected from the selection table 222i and set in the scenario storage areas 1 and 2 of the scenario storage area 223e (S1921).

In this way, before driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the state of each drive body is determined, and a scenario table suitable for the state is set to display a predetermined value. Drive control can be easily performed so that the surfaces come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the next fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the middle of the drive control process due to the processing failure of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the display surface different from the normal one is displayed on the front surface. Even when the display surfaces are stored in the storage position on the side, the regular display surfaces can be brought into contact with each other to be driven. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the predetermined notification mode by bringing the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 900 into contact with each other with a predetermined display surface facing the front. it can.

In the present embodiment, only the case where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are brought into contact with each other with the C surfaces 900c and 910c facing the front has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In practice, the variation pattern presets the surfaces that come into contact with the front surface. Therefore, the variation pattern selected drives the various surfaces to come into contact with each other toward the front side. Therefore, the player can enjoy by combining the notification content notified by the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 with the display mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81. it can.

In the present embodiment, the display surface facing the front side of the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 at the storage position is a predetermined display surface (in the present embodiment, the A surface 900, 910a). The corrected rotation drive scenario table executed when the case is different from) is set so as to make the timing of starting rotation different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the speed of approaching each other may be changed. Specifically, the moving speed of the driving body in which the deviation occurs is set to be faster, the rotation position is corrected in the rotation allowable region, and then the driving body is driven in accordance with the speed of the other driving body. You may. With this configuration, the deviation of the display surface can be easily corrected.

The contents described in the first to third embodiments may be combined.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by being displaced, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means includes the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When moving the above, the two are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movably controlled so as to be positioned on the front side of each other, and the approaching is performed by the movable control means. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the positional direction, the first movable means and the second movable means are each set to the predetermined display surface. The position determining means for determining whether or not the approaching position can be reached while the is located on the front side, and the movable control means when the position determining means determines that the approaching position is unreachable. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a correction control means for executing a correction movable control for correcting the predetermined display surface so as to face the front side at an approaching position.

According to the game machine A1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable. Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

In the game machine A1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. 2. A displacement permissible region that allows displacement with the movable means is set, and a position at which the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced is provided in the displacement permissible region. The game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the correction movable control interrupts the first movable means and the second movable means from moving toward each other in the approaching position direction, and causes the first movable means and the second movable means to move. After the means is displaced at the approaching position until the correction completed state in which the predetermined display surface is located on the front side, the first movable means is subjected to the same movable control as the normal movable control. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the second movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having a movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by displacing it, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means places the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When they are moved, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movably controlled so as to be positioned on the front side of each other. When moving from the first to the approaching position, it is determined whether the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position are predetermined display surfaces. When the state determination means and the state determination means determine that the display surface is different from the predetermined display surface, the movable control means is approached to the movable control means at the approach position based on the display surface facing the front side. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a correction control means for selecting and executing a correction movable control for correcting so that a predetermined display surface faces the front side.

According to the game machine B1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable. Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

In the game machine B1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. 2 Displacement allowable areas that allow displacement with the movable means are set, and the respective correction movable controls are within the displacement allowable area corresponding to each display surface located on the front side at the separated position. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the timing at which the first movable means and the second movable means are started to be displaced after being moved to a different position is set differently.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.

In the game machine B1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. A displacement allowable area that allows displacement with the two movable means is set, and each of the corrected movable controls can be moved to the approaching position corresponding to each display surface located on the front side at the separated position. A game machine B3 characterized in that each speed is set differently.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by being displaced, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means includes the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When moving the above, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movablely controlled so as to be located on the front side of each other. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, By a state determining means for determining whether each of the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position is a predetermined display surface, and the state determining means. It has a movable frequency changing means for setting the first movable means and the second movable means to a state in which the movable means is more easily controlled than the normal state when it is determined that the display surface is different from the predetermined display surface. A game machine C1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the state determining means determines whether the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position are predetermined display surfaces. When the state determining means determines that the display surface is different from the display surface, the first movable means and the second movable means are set to a special state in which the movable means is more easily controlled than the normal state by the movable frequency changing means. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, if the display surface facing the front side when starting to move at the separated position is different from the normal state, it is more movable than in the normal state. Since it is easily moved by the control means, it can be easily returned to the normal state again. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

The game machine C1 has an effect determining means for determining an effect mode related to a game from an effect group composed of a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode group includes the first movable means and the second movable means. A movable effect mode set to move the movable means from the separated position to the approaching position is included, and the movable effect mode is selected more than usual in the movable frequency changing means. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is set to be.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect mode related to the game is determined by the effect determination means means from the effect mode group composed of a plurality of effect modes. The effect mode group includes a movable effect mode in which the first movable means and the second movable means are set to be moved from a separated position to an approached position. It is set by the movable frequency changing means so that the movable effect mode is selected more than usual. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural feeling and to make it easier to select the movable effect mode.

In the game machine C1 or C2, in a state where the state determination means determines that a display surface different from the predetermined display surface is facing the front side, the movable control means approaches the distance position. When it is movable with respect to a position, it is corrected so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side at the approaching position with respect to the movable control means based on the display surface facing the front side. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by having a correction control means for selecting and executing correction movable control.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, when the state determining means determines that the display surface different from the predetermined display surface is facing the front side, and the movable control means moves the display surface from the separated position to the approaching position. , Based on the display surface facing the front side, the correction movable control is selected and executed by the correction control means to correct so that the display surface predetermined at the close position to the movable control means faces the front side. .. Therefore, by moving the first movable means and the second movable means, there is an effect that the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means can be set in a normal direction at a separated position.

A gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A game machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
900 Upper rotation drive body (an example of the first movable means)
910 Lower rotation drive body (an example of the second movable means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of movable control means)
S1701 Position determination means S1706 Correction control means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a driving object is driven to perform a game effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-200382

In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to stably control the driven object due to a decrease in the operation frequency of the driven object .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of more stably controlling a driven object.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 has a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position in order to achieve this object, and the movable means has a plurality of display surfaces. By displace the plurality of display surfaces, a predetermined display surface among the plurality of display surfaces can be arranged at a predetermined position, and the game machine can move the movable means. The movable means is movable while at least a plurality of display surfaces are displaced between the first position and the second position based on the determination that the movable means is moved by the movable table for determining the above. When the movable control means to be controlled and the display surface facing the front side of the movable means, which is stopped at the first position when a predetermined condition is satisfied, are in a different arrangement state from the predetermined initial state. It also has means for setting the movable table in which the probability that the movable means is moved by the movable control means is higher than that in the normal state .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the movable means has a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position, and the movable means has a plurality of display surfaces. By displacing the plurality of display surfaces, a predetermined display surface among the plurality of display surfaces can be arranged at a predetermined position, and the game machine determines to move the movable means. Movable control means for movably controlling the movable means while displacing at least the plurality of display surfaces between the first position and the second position based on the determination that the movable means is moved by the movable table. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the display surface facing the front side of the movable means, which is stopped at the first position, is in a different arrangement state from the predetermined initial state, the movable means. Has a means for setting the movable table in which the probability of being moved by the movable control means is higher than that in the normal state .

Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board before the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are driven, and (b) is a direction in which the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body approach each other. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of a game board in a driven state, and (c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a game board in a state where the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are driven to the position closest to each other. (A) is a diagram showing a display surface formed when the A surfaces of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body are closest to each other, and (b) is a view showing the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body. It is a figure which showed the display surface which is formed when the B planes are closest to each other, and (c) is the display which is formed when the C planes of an upper rotation drive body and a lower rotation drive body are closest to each other. It is a figure which showed the surface, (d) is the figure which showed the display surface formed when the D surface of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body is the closest to each other. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive scenario table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive origin scenario table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation drive origin scenario table. It is the figure which showed the content of the scenario table schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the content of the vertical drive origin scenario table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a rotation drive correction scenario table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a vertical drive scenario table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a motor scenario table (rotational drive), (b) is a diagram schematically showing a motor scenario table (vertical drive), and (c) is a diagram schematically showing a motor. It is the figure which showed the spec setting table (rotational drive) schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the motor spec setting table (vertical drive) schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the correction operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drive correction processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the motor output processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the structure of the upper rotation drive body and the lower rotation drive body in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a left shaft support of the upper rotation drive body in the second embodiment, and (b) is a detailed configuration of a detection piece of the upper rotation drive body in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the correction scenario table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the corrected rotation drive scenario table 1 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the corrected rotation drive scenario table 2 in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the content of the correction rotation drive scenario table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the motor command determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the background of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball is likely to enter the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of jackpots of the special symbol, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). Further, in "big hit A" and "big hit B", in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the big hit is different from each other. Specifically, "big hit A" is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the next big hit of the special symbol, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is further increased, and "big hit B" is the big hit. From the end to the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than during the time saving. .. Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

In addition, when the special symbol becomes a jackpot and shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (book) after the jackpot of the special symbol ends. In the embodiment, it is continued until the end (100 times). On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if a new special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the lottery for the specified number of special symbols, the process returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. , The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”), a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs, and a third symbol display. An upper rotation drive body 900 and a lower rotation drive body 910 arranged on the front surface side of the device 81 are provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged on the front side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 4, 5, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbol combination (in the present embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first entry port 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 responds to the variation display of the first symbol display device 37 with the third symbol. Fluctuation display is performed.

Further, the configuration of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. As shown in FIG. 2, normally, the upper rotation drive body 900 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81 so as to overlap the back side of the center frame 86. Further, the lower rotation drive body 910 is usually arranged downward so that the area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is minimized. Although the details will be described later, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to be vertically driveable (movable), and further, each is configured to be rotatable.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 6, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotate about the vertical direction of the game machine, the upper rotation drive body 900 descends, and the lower rotation drive body 910 Rise. Then, they come into contact with each other (contact) with their predetermined surfaces (predetermined by the fluctuation pattern) facing the front side. Here, "contact" means that the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other, a slight gap is formed on each display surface. The contacting positions are driven to close positions. Of course, the display surfaces may be configured to be in contact with each other. By contacting each other, as shown in FIG. 6, the player is notified of a predetermined notification mode (in the example of FIG. 6, the character "chance" is displayed). In addition, when they are close to each other, the display surfaces may be aligned (fused) so that the displayed contents can be identified.

The configuration of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 7. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the upper rotation drive body 900, the description of the lower rotation drive body 910 will be omitted for the same configuration as the description.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper rotation drive body 900 has a box-shaped display surface composed of a rectangular parallelepiped having A surface 900a, B surface 900b, C surface 900c, and D surface 900d. The upper rotation drive body 900 is rotatably supported by a right shaft support 900R provided on the right side 900e and a left shaft support 900L provided on the left side 900f. The right shaft support 900R is formed by forming a right cylindrical portion 900Ra which is formed in a cylindrical shape and is configured to be fitted with a shaft portion protruding from the right surface 900e, which will be described later, and a right cylindrical portion protruding to the right from the right end portion of the cylindrical portion. It is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped right protruding piece 900Rb. Similarly, the left shaft display portion 900L is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is configured to fit with a shaft portion protruding from the left side direction 900f, which will be described later, and a left cylindrical portion 900La and a left end portion of the cylindrical portion to the left. It is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped left projecting piece 900Lb formed by projecting.

From the right side 900e, a shaft portion (not shown) configured to be inscribed with the right shaft branch 900R is provided so as to project. Further, from the left side 900f, a shaft portion (not shown) configured to be inscribed with the left shaft support portion 900L is provided so as to project.

Further, an upper rotation drive gear 901, which is a pinion gear for rotation, is provided so as to project from the right side 900e. Further, the right shaft branch 900R is provided with an upper rotation motor 903 which is a stepping motor for rotation drive, and the upper rotation motor 903 is provided with an upper rotation gear 902 that fits with the upper rotation drive gear 901. Has been done. The upper rotation motor 903 operates and the upper rotation gear 902 rotates to rotate the upper rotation drive gear 901 and rotate the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900.

Further, the right protruding piece 900Ra of the right shaft branch 900R is provided with an upper drive motor 905 which is a stepping motor for vertical drive. The upper drive motor 905 is provided with a vertical drive gear 906, which is a pinion gear that fits with the vertical drive rack 990. On the right rear side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 move up and down, respectively, but gears that fit with the vertical drive gears 906 and 916, respectively. The rack having the portions is arranged in the vertical direction longer than the moving stroke of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910.

At the rear of the left end portion of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, a support column 991 provided with a groove for preventing slippage is provided longer than the vertical drive stroke. A support column 991 can be inserted into the left protruding pieces 900Lb and 910Lb of the left shaft support 900L and 910L of the upper rotation driving body 900 and the lower rotation driving body 910.

By inserting the support column 991 through the left shaft support 900L in this way, the upper rotation drive body 900 can be smoothly driven up and down. Further, the vibration of the upper rotation drive body 900 can be suppressed. Further, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 can rotate smoothly because it is pivotally supported by the shaft portion inscribed in the right side shaft support 900R and the left side shaft support 900L. Further, the vibration of the upper rotation drive body 900 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the right shaft support 900R is provided with an upper rotation sensor 908 which is a reflective sensor for detecting the origin position of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900. A detection piece 907 detected by the upper rotation sensor 908 is projected on the right side surface 900e. Further, a detection piece 904 for detecting the upper drive sensor 920 (see FIG. 8) is provided so as to project above the right end portion of the right protruding piece 900Ra of the right shaft support portion 900R. The detection piece 904 is for detecting the origin position by the upper drive sensor 920 (see FIG. 8) for detecting the origin position in the vertical direction of the upper rotation drive body 900.

8 (a) to 8 (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board cut from the right side of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, and the cross section thereof viewed from the right side. As shown in FIG. 8A, a drive base body 800 for fixing the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 to the back side of the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the game board 13. ing. The drive base body 800 is made of a resin such as polycarbonate, has a frame shape having an opening communicating with the opening of the game board 13, and is fixed to the back side so as to cover the opening of the game board 13. ing. A support column 991 and a rack 990 are fixed to the drive base 800, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are held so as to be vertically movable. A third symbol display device 81 is attached to the back side of the back base body 800.

FIG. 8A shows a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 800 are arranged above and below the third symbol display device 81, which are the positions when they are stored in the normal state, respectively. It is a figure shown. At the time of storage, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stored so that the A surfaces 900a and 910a face the front side, respectively.

In the drive base body 800, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven from each other from the storage position (origin position), decorative frames 801, 802 for decorating the storage position have a frame shape. It is provided. With the decorative frames 801, 802, even when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven from the storage position, the design of the vacant area can be improved.

When the position is in the stowed position shown in FIG. 8A, the rotation of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is regulated by the decorative frames 801 and 802, respectively, on the back side thereof. The region where the rotation of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is regulated by the decorative frames 801, 802 is referred to as a rotation regulation region. Further, a region in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 approach each other and enter each other's rotation region is also a rotation regulation region.

With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates during storage, and when driving, the surface on which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are set. It is possible to prevent a problem that makes it difficult for each other to come into contact with each other.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven to a position where they do not come into contact with the decorative frames 801, 802 and start to rotate. .. The region excluding the rotation restricting region does not come into contact with the upper rotation driving body 900 and the lower rotation driving body 910 as a rotation allowable region.

FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other. In the present embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other, the same surfaces (for example, C surfaces) of the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are used. ) Is driven so as to be located on the front side. The details of this drive control will be described later. In the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to approach each other at the same speed and come into contact with each other, but they approach each other at different speeds and have different movement amounts. Of course, it may be configured to be in contact with. With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven in various ways.

9 (a) to 9 (d) are views showing a state in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other. FIG. 9A shows a state in which the A surface 900a of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the A surface 910a of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). The state where the D surface 900d of the display surface of the above and the B surface 910b of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) is shown. In this state, the player is notified of the "☆" symbol. Here, the symbol "☆" indicates the degree of expectation (expected value) for the player to win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9B shows a state in which the B surface 900b of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the B surface 910b of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). The state where the A surface 900a of the display surface of the above and the C surface 910c of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) is shown. In this state, the player is notified of the "?" Symbol. Here, the symbol "?" Indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9C shows a state in which the C surface 900c of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the C surface 910c of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). A state in which the B surface 900b of the display surface and the D surface 910d of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) are shown. In this state, the player is notified of the character "chance". Here, the character "chance" indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

FIG. 9D shows a state in which the D surface 900d of the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the D surface 910d of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other facing the front side (upper rotation drive body 900). A state in which the C surface 900c of the display surface and the A surface 910a of the display surface of the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other) are shown. In this state, the player is notified of the symbol "Δ". Here, the symbol of "Δ" indicates the degree of expectation that the player will win the lottery result of the special symbol (first symbol).

In this way, the expected value (probability of winning) that the special symbol (first symbol) is hit is set for each of the symbols and characters shown by the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively. , "Chance" character notification is more likely to be selected in the case of the most hit than "☆", "△", "?", Then in the order of "☆", "△", "?" The probability of being selected in the case of hitting is set high. Therefore, the player can have different expectations for the lottery result depending on the notification content notified by the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the first entry port 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is three times or less, or five times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is caused by the turning on of the first entry opening switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (a jackpot of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16 in this embodiment)), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64, for example. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "7,107,282" are special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol becoming the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), it returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. When this is done, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12B, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the fluctuation display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and another storage area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 17 and S405 in FIG. 19). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 21).

The time saving / medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot B is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot (this). In the embodiment, 100) is set. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit B is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 17). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 17).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

When the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the values match each other, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

Therefore, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the result is obtained by comparing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the execution area with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Therefore, if no matching value is found, the processing will take a long time. If no matching value is found and the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment) is out of order, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the stop type selection table as a process of determining the stop type at the time of the out-of-order. Since the process of comparing with the random value is performed, it takes more time for the process. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is a random number value that becomes a "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the same reach. After the occurrence, a process is performed in which the final stop symbol is compared with a random value that is "reach other than front and back" that stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and a random value that is "completely out of reach" that does not cause reach.

Further, the MPU 201 provided in the main control device 110 usually uses an 8-bit MPU in order to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, but the 8-bit MPU is used to generate 2 bytes. It takes a lot of processing time to compare the values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning of the ball into the first entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Specifically, the first ball entry switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the first ball entry port 64 is turned off in the timer interrupt process of 1 (the first timer interrupt process). Is detected, the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) detects that the first ball entry switch is on, and the subsequent timer interrupt process (third timer interrupt process). When it is detected that the first ball entry switch is on, it is detected that the ball has been won in the first ball entry port 64. As a result, when the output of the first ball entry switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of winning a ball. In this way, the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the winning to the first entry port 64 is detected by a certain timer interrupt process, the next In the timer interrupt process of, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is never detected. Therefore, among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the start prize is not detected in both of the two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and an upper rotation drive body. It controls the output of drive control data between the 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the fluctuation effect (variation display), and the like. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, an upper rotation motor 903, a lower rotation motor 913, an upper drive motor 905, and a lower drive motor 915. , Upper rotation sensor 908, lower rotation sensor 918, upper drive sensor 920, lower drive sensor 930, and the like are connected to each other.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a rotation drive scenario table 222a, a rotation drive origin scenario table 222b, a rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, a vertical drive scenario table 222d, a vertical drive origin scenario table 222e, and a vertical drive correction scenario table 222f. At least a motor scenario table 222g and a motor spec setting table 222h are provided.

The rotation drive scenario table 222a is a data table in which drive control data of the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 is set. The rotation drive scenario table 222a is executed when the operation timings of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 set in advance in the fluctuation pattern are reached. As shown in FIG. 13A, the time set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a sets the drive time of each operation scenario after the operation timing is reached. The sensor data indicates that, when set to ON, the upper rotation sensor 908 or the lower rotation sensor 918 is set to operate until it is turned ON. The number of steps indicates the value of the step counter 223j for stopping the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913. The speed is set to operate the stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913.

In the present embodiment, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms, and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms, and the speed is 3. In the case of, the speed at which the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms, and when the speed is 4, the speed at which the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. That is, speed 1 is set at the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 speed of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1 / of speed 1. The speed is 4. Note that speed 0 indicates a stop.

The direction indicates the direction in which the motor is rotated, the forward direction is the direction in which the excitation counter 223h is added and updated, and the reverse direction is the direction in which the excitation counter 223h is subtracted and updated. Rotate. Direction 0 indicates that the motor is stopped.

Here, when the operation timing of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 set in the fluctuation pattern is reached, an operation scenario corresponding to a time of 1000 ms is set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a. Since the number of steps 0, the speed 0, and the direction 0 are set for 1000 ms, it is shown that the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 910 are stopped for 1000 ms. When the time of 1000 ms elapses, the next operation scenario is set. In the next operation scenario, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 903 are set in the forward direction at a speed of 1 until the step counter 223j reaches 150 during 3000 ms. Rotate the rotary motor 913. When the step counter 223j is rotated until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 150 during 3000 ms, the operation flag 223o is set to ON, and the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 stand by in a stopped state. In the present embodiment, the time required to drive the step counters 0 to 150 to speed 1 is set to 3000 ms.

Next, when 3000 ms elapses, the next operation scenario is set, and the step counter 150 waits for 2000 ms. When 2000 ms has elapsed and the next operation scenario is set, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 2 until the value of the step counter becomes 0. When the value of the step counter is 0, both the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in a state where the A surfaces 900a and 910a are positioned in the front as shown in FIG. 7, and the value of the step counter. When is 150, both the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in a state where the C surfaces 900c and 910c are located on the front side as shown in FIG.

That is, in the rotation drive scenario table 222a, the A-side 900a and 910a are kept on the front side for 1000 ms, and the C-side 900c and 910c are rotated for 3000 ms until they are on the front side. After that, the state is maintained for 2000 ms and rotated in the opposite direction at 6000 ms to drive the A-sides 900a and 910a to the front side.

The rotary drive origin scenario table 222b sets the origin positions of the upper rotary motor 903 and the lower rotary motor 913 in the drive origin process (S1212) in the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is a data table in which drive control data is set. In this rotation drive origin scenario table, as shown in FIG. 13B, after waiting for 5000 ms, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor-918 are turned on at a speed of 4 for 3000 ms. Drive control is set to drive each in the opposite direction.

The rotation drive correction scenario table 222c is for correcting the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 when it is determined that they cannot come into contact with each other with the predetermined display surface facing the front. It is a data table in which the drive control data of is set. In this rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, as shown in FIG. 14A (until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 75, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 rotate at a speed of 1 in the forward direction. The value of the step counter 223j is 75. When the value of the step counter 223j is 180, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are normally positioned on the front side of the C surface 900c and 910c. It is a value in which the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are in contact with each other in this state.

The vertical drive scenario table 222d is a data table in which drive control data for driving the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are set. In this vertical drive scenario table 222d, the motor is driven in the positive direction at a speed of 1 until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 200 for 4000 ms, and after waiting for 1000 ms with the value of the step counter being 200, For 8000 ms, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 2 until the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on, respectively.

That is, in this vertical drive scenario table 222d, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven until they come into contact with each other (the position of the step counter 200 is set to contact each other), and in that state, 1000 ms. It waits and moves to the origin position over 8000 ms.

The vertical drive origin scenario table 222e sets the origin positions of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 in the drive origin process (S1212) in the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is a data table in which drive control data is set. In this vertical drive origin scenario table 222e, as shown in FIG. 13D, after driving at a speed of 4 in the positive direction until the value of the step counter reaches 25 for 5000 ms, the state is maintained for 3000 ms. Then, in 5000 ms, the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are driven in the opposite directions at a speed of 4 until they are turned on. If the power supply is cut off during the origin setting operation and the power is turned on again, the operation is executed again from the first operation scenario of the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e.

The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is used to correct the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 when it is determined that they cannot come into contact with each other with the predetermined display surface facing the front. It is a data table in which the drive control data of is set. The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is executed in the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505) in the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 14B, the values of the step counter 223j in the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are stopped at the position of 180 for 8000 ms.

In this way, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven upward to see if they can be in contact with each other with the C surfaces 900c and 910c, which are predetermined display surfaces, facing the front side. The value of the motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 is determined at the position of 180. Then, when it is determined that the display surfaces come into contact with each other facing the front side, the correction control set by the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is executed. .. In this correction control, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven (moved) in the direction in which they are in contact with each other (approaching direction) for 8000 ms, and are stopped (stopped) during that time. The motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are driven to normal positions (step counter values). Therefore, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be brought into contact with each other with the normal display surface facing the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that different information is notified to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the motor scenario table 222g includes a rotation drive scenario table 222a and a vertical drive scenario table 222d corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main controller 110, respectively. It is a set data table. In the present embodiment, for the sake of simplification of the description, the rotation drive scenario table 222a and the vertical drive scenario table 222d are of one type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of scenario tables may be set. With this configuration, the display surface located on the front side can be changed or the operation patterns (speed, rotation speed, etc.) of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be changed according to the fluctuation pattern. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

As shown in FIGS. 15C and 15D, the motor spec setting table 222h is a data table in which the motor specifications of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 are set. Is. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 perform operations that are reversed from each other, but in this motor spec setting table 222h, the excitation data (exciting layer) corresponding to the excitation counter 223h is reversed. Since it is set, the same scenario can be used in common. As a result, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be controlled without having a dedicated scenario table, and the amount of data in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol hold ball number counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a fluctuation pattern storage area 223d, a scenario storage area 223e, a correction scenario storage area 223f, and excitation. At least a data storage area 223g, an excitation counter 223h, an excitation timer 223i, a step counter 223j, a motor number storage area 223k, a drive spec storage area 223m, a correction flag 223n, an operation flag 223o, and other storage areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1911 in FIG. 34). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. be able to. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223b is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2002 in FIG. 35). When the variation start flag 223b is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223c is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1908 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2006 in FIG. 35). When the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set as it is.

The variation pattern storage area 223d stores data of various variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern commands output from the main control device 110.

When the scenario storage area 223e receives the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation pattern includes an effect of driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. , Each scenario (rotational drive scenario table 222a, vertical drive scenario table 222c, etc.) selected from the motor scenario table 222g showing the driving contents of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is stored. It is a storage area. In this scenario storage area 223e, each scenario selected in the process of S1905 of the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set).

The correction scenario storage area 223f is a storage area in which the scenario is stored when the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c or the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f is selected. In the correction scenario storage area 223f, each scenario selected in the process of S1706 of the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set).

The excitation data storage area 223g is the excitation data corresponding to the values of the excitation counters 223h corresponding to the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 (FIGS. 15 (c) and 15 (d)). Reference) is a storage area for storage. A storage area is set for each motor in the excitation data storage area 223g.

The excitation counter 223h is a counter for setting a layer for exciting each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915. The excitation counter 223h is a counter value updated in the range of 1 to 4, is updated to the maximum value of 4, and then is updated to the initial value of 1. As shown in FIGS. 15 (c) and 15 (d), the excitation counter 223h is provided with layers to be excited corresponding to each counter value.

The step counter 223j is a counter value for counting the number of steps of each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915.

The motor number storage area 223k is a storage area in which the number of stepping motors is stored. In the present embodiment, 4 which is the number of each stepping motor of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 is stored. In the motor number storage area 223k, the number of motors (4 in the present embodiment) is stored in the process of S1214 of the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, when a design change is made to change the number of motors by setting the number of motors, the drive control can be easily changed by changing the number stored in the number storage area 223k of the motors. be able to.

The drive spec storage area 223m is a storage area in which the spec information of each motor stored in the motor spec setting table 222h (see FIGS. 15C and 15D) is stored. In this drive spec storage area 223 m, motor spec information is stored in the process of S1213 of the start-up process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are joined, the correction flag 223n fronts a display surface different from a predetermined display surface (C surface 900c, 910c in this embodiment). It is a flag indicating that it is in a state of being joined. This correction flag 223n is set to off in the initial state (when the power is turned on, etc.), and in the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower side When the value of the step counter 223j with the rotary motor 913 is not the set value (75 in this embodiment), the process of S1704 is executed to set the value to ON. Further, when the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is a set value (75 in this embodiment), the process of S1703 is executed to set the value to off.

The operation flag 223o is a flag indicating that the operation of the operation scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223e has been completed. This operation flag 223o is set to off in the initial state (when the power is turned on, etc.), and is turned on in the process of S1511 of the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is set to. Further, in the processing of the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the setting time of the operation scenario of the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223e has elapsed, a new operation scenario has elapsed. After the operation scenario is stored, it is set to off in the processing of S1407. Further, in the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 on the voice lamp control device 113, it is set to off in the process of S1906.

The RAM 223 has an other storage area 223z, such as a command storage area for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 34) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 are already known and will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entry port 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. After executing the through-gate passage process (S107), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, it is a hit of 16 rounds, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation is set in which the determination of the jackpot of the special symbol is executed with high probability (S213). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215).

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If the above is the case (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (during a probabilistic gaming state) (S302). Here, it is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is set to on. The probability change flag is set to on when the jackpot A is set, and is set to off when the jackpot B is set.

When the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S302 that the game is in a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the pachinko machine 10 was acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the hit is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation of the special symbol is set), and the value is "60 to 99". If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short period of time for a normal symbol) (see FIG. 10 (a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 23). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry port 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 23) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the normal symbol hits, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, then when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 35, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1211). Next, the drive origin process for detecting and setting the origins of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is executed (S1212). In this drive origin process (S1212), the rotary drive origin scenario table 222b and the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e are stored in the scenario storage area 223e, respectively, and the origin detection process is executed. Specifically, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13D, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 each have a speed of 4 (every 4 ms) up to 25 steps in a time of 0 to 5000 ms. It is driven in the positive direction (direction approaching each other) at the speed of advancing one step. In the present embodiment, the region from 0 to 20 steps is set to the region where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are located within the range of the rotation regulation region, and the number of steps is more than that. In the region where the is driven, it will be located in the rotation allowable region. Therefore, the position where the 25 steps are driven becomes the rotation allowable region.

Next, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13 (d), the vertical drive drive is stopped at the position of 25 steps for 3000 ms, and during that time, the rotary drive scenario table of FIG. 13 (b) is stopped. As shown in 222b, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor 918 are rotated in opposite directions at a speed of 4 until they are turned on. After that, as shown in the vertical drive origin scenario table 222e of FIG. 13 (d), the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are separated from each other in the opposite direction (upper rotation drive body 900 and lower rotation drive body 910) until the upper drive sensor 920 and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on. It is driven to speed 4 in the direction of movement). Then, the position where the upper rotation sensor 908, the lower rotation sensor 918, the upper drive sensor 920, and the lower drive sensor 930 are turned on is set as the origin of each motor.

If a power failure occurs while the drive origin process (S1212) is being executed, the drive origin process (S1212) is executed again from the beginning. When the value of the step counter 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is stopped at the position 25, it is stopped at that position for 8000 ms. After that, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed.

After the drive origin processing (S1212) is executed, the spec information of the upper rotation motor 903, the lower rotation drive motor 913, the upper drive motor 905, and the lower drive motor 915 from the motor spec setting table 222h (in this embodiment, each of them). Information on the origin detection sensor corresponding to the motor and information on the step excitation data) are set in the drive spec storage area 223 m, respectively.

In this embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to set common drive data (rotation drive scenario table 222a, etc.), respectively. This motor spec setting table Since the order of the layers to be excited is set according to each motor by 222h, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 move up and down so as to approach each other by rotating in opposite directions. Even if there is, drive control can be performed with common drive data. Therefore, the data capacity of the drive data can be reduced, and the capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

Next, the number of motors (4 in this embodiment) is set in the motor number storage area 223k. Here, by configuring to set the number of motors, if the number of motors is changed in a similar game machine, etc., control is performed by simply changing the specifications so that the number of motors set here is changed. Can be easily matched. After this, the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, the processing of S1204 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1316 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1314. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1302 to S1314 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1316 and the variation display setting process of S1317 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1316 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1317 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is made, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expected value of the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, the time set in the scenario of the motor scenario (rotation drive scenario table 222a, vertical drive scenario table 222d, etc.) which is the drive data for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. A motor scenario process is performed to perform measurement (update) and execute a process of sequentially storing scenarios (drive data) in the scenario storage area 223e at the timing of shifting to the scenario set at the next time (S1311). The details of this motor scenario processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In the process of S1312, a motor command monitoring process for executing a process of driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 based on the drive data set in the motor scenario process (S1311) is performed (S1312). .. The details of this motor command monitoring process (S1312) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. After the motor command monitoring process (S1312) is executed, the drive correction process (S1313) is executed.

In the process of S1313, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven, it is determined whether or not they can be contacted at a predetermined contact surface, and if they cannot be contacted, the correction is performed. The drive correction process for executing the process is performed (S1313). The details of this drive correction process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After the drive correction process (S1313) is executed, the process of the motor output process (S1314) is executed.

In the process of S1314, the motor output process is performed in which the commands for executing the motor control set in the motor command monitoring process (S1312) and the drive correction process (S1313) are output to each motor (S1314). The details of this motor output process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After the motor output process (s1314) is executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1316.

In the process of S1316, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1316). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

After the command determination process (S1316), the variable display setting process is executed (S1317). In the variation display setting process (S1317), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the processing of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1320), and the power-off process is executed (S1321). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1322), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1318: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a motor scenario process (S1311), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this motor scenario processing (S1311). This motor scenario process (S1311) executes a process of setting drive data for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively.

In the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311), first, 1 is set in the variable [B] (S1401). This variable [B] is a variable for indicating which motor to set, and if the variable [B] is 1, the upper rotation motor 903, and if the variable [B] is 2, the lower If the rotary motor 913 and the variable [B] are 3, the upper drive motor 905 is set, and if the variable [B] is 4, the lower drive motor 915 is set.

Next, it is determined whether the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1402). If it is determined to be 4 or less (S1402: Yes), it is stored in the scenario storage area [B] (if the variable [B] is 1, the scenario storage area 1) in the scenario storage area 223e. It is determined whether the time of the scenario is the END time (S1403). If it is determined that it is not the END time (S1403: No), it is determined whether the time of the current scenario set in the scenario storage area [B] of the scenario storage area 223e is 0 (S1404). If it is determined that the scenario time is not 0 (S1404: No), the scenario time set in the scenario storage area [B] is subtracted by 1. The scenario time set in the scenario storage area [B] indicates the time set in the rotation drive scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A) or the like, and the rotation scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A). In FIG. 13 (a)), when this scenario table is set in the scenario storage table [B], first, a scenario corresponding to the time 1000 ms, which is the top scenario, is set, and S1405 from this time 1000 ms. The update is executed by subtracting 1 by 1 in the process of. After that, the process of S1408 is executed.

If it is determined that the time in the scenario storage area [B] is 0 (S1404: Yes), the next scenario in the scenario table set in the scenario storage area [B] is set in the scenario storage area [B]. It is set (S1406). The operation flag 223o is set to off (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time in the scenario storage area [B] is the END time (S1403), the process of S1408 is executed. In the process of S1408, a process of adding 1 to the value of the variable [B] is executed (S1408). After that, the process returns to S1402 again, the same process is repeatedly executed, and when the variable [B] is larger than 4 (that is, the update of the scenario for all the motors is completed) (S1402: No), this End the process.

Next, the motor command monitoring process (S1312), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. 28 to 30 are flowcharts showing the motor command monitoring process (S1312). This motor command monitoring process (S1312) issues a command for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 based on each scenario set in the process of the motor scenario process (FIGS. 27, S1311). Execute the process to set each.

In the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 28, S1312), first, it is determined whether the time of the scenario table of all the scenario storage areas stored in the scenario storage area 223e and the correction scenario storage area 223f is the END time (S1501). ). When it is determined that the time of all the scenario tables is the END time (S1501: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the times in all the scenario tables are not the END times (S1501: No), the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1502). Note that this variable [B] is set to correspond to each motor in the same manner as described in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311). It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1503).

When the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1503: Yes), it is determined whether the variable [B] is 3 or 4 (that is, whether it is the upper drive motor 905 or the lower drive motor 915). (S1504). When it is determined that the variable [B] is 3 or 4 (S1504: Yes), it is determined whether the correction flag 223n is on (S1505). If it is determined that the correction flag 223n is on (S1505: Yes), the correction operation process is executed (S1506). On the other hand, when the variable [B] is not 3 or 4 (S1504: No), or when the correction flag 223n is off (S1505: No), the process of S1507 is executed.

In this way, when the variable [B] is 3 or 4, by determining whether the correction flag 223n is on, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are mutually described, although the details will be described later. When the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 move in the direction of contact and the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 reach a predetermined number of steps before the contact, the number of steps of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is the set value (this). In the embodiment, it is determined whether the state is different from 38), and if it is different, the correction operation process (S1506) for correcting it is executed. Therefore, based on the scenario table stored in the correction scenario storage area 223f, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven and corrected so as to be brought into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface. Therefore, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 comes into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface due to a cause such as when the drive is started from a state in which the A surfaces 900a and 910a are not stored in the storage position toward the front side. Even if a problem that cannot be caused occurs, it can be solved by correcting the problem. If the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are not stored with the A surfaces 900a and 910a facing the front when the lower rotation drive body 910 is stored, the processing of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not executed every 1 ms. When the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 receives a command (variation pattern command) for starting fluctuation of a new special symbol (third symbol) during driving due to a fall or the like, the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates upward. This may occur when the rotary drive of the drive body 900 or the lower rotary drive body 910 is stopped and retracted. Further, it may occur when the rotation is not structurally driven normally and is stored.

In the process of S1507, the scenario stored in the scenario storage area [B] of the scenario storage area 223e is extracted (S1507). It is determined whether the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is on (S1508). If the operation flag 223o is on (S1508: Yes), the process of S1514 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation flag 223o is off (S1508: No), it is determined whether the stored scenario sensor data is off (S1509). When it is determined that the sensor data is off (S1509: Yes), it is determined whether the step counter [B] (the step counter of the motor corresponding to the variable [B]) is the step counter of the scenario in which it is stored. (S1510). When it is determined that the step counter [B] is the same as the step counter of the scenario (S1510: Yes), the operation flag 223o is set to ON (S1511). After that, the process proceeds to S1514. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step counter [B] does not match the step counter of the scenario (S1510: No), the process proceeds to S1514.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor data of the stored scenario is on (S1509: No), the motor sensor [B] (if the motor sensor 1, the upper rotation sensor 908 and the motor sensor 2 may be used. For example, it is determined whether the state of the upper drive sensor 920 for the lower rotation sensor 918 and the motor sensor 3 and the lower drive sensor 930 for the motor sensor 4) is ON (S1512). When it is determined that the state of the motor sensor [B] is on (S1512: Yes), the step counter [B] is set to 0, and the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is set to on (S1513). .. After that, the process proceeds to S1514.

In the process of S1514, the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is off, and it is determined whether the speed and rotation direction of the stored scenario are not 0 (S1514). When the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is off and it is determined that the speed and rotation direction of the stored scenario are 0 (S1514: Yes), the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i is set to 1. to add. Here, the excitation timer 223i is a timer for controlling the speed of each motor, and is a timer for counting how many cycles the motors are excited.

Here, since the motor command monitoring process (S1312) is executed every 1 ms, the maximum value of the speed of each motor is the speed at which the motor is excited and driven every 1 ms (corresponding to speed 1). The speed 2 set in the scenario drives the motor at half the speed of speed 1 by exciting the motor every 2 ms to drive the motor. Further, the speed 3 drives the motor at a speed of 1/3 of the speed 1 by exciting the motor every 3 ms. Further, the speed 4 drives the motor at a speed of 1/4 of the speed 1 by exciting the motor every 4 ms. The excitation timer 223i is used to execute a process of exciting the motor at intervals corresponding to a set speed.

It is determined whether the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i is the same as the speed set in the scenario (S1516). When it is determined that the speed setting is the same as that of the excitation timer [B] (S1516: Yes), the excitation timer [B] is set (reset) to 0 (S1517). On the other hand, when it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the speed setting do not match (S1516: No), the process proceeds to S1518.

In the process of S1518, it is determined whether the value of the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1518). If it is determined that the value of the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1518: Yes), the process proceeds to S1519. On the other hand, when it is determined that the speed or rotation direction of the scenario in which the operation flag 223o of the corresponding scenario is on or stored is 0 (S1514: No), or the excitation timer [B] is determined to be non-zero. If this is done (S1518: No), the process of S1533 is executed.

In the process of S1519, it is determined whether the direction set in the scenario is the positive direction (S1519). When it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the positive direction (S1519: Yes), it is determined whether the step counter [B] is the same as the number of steps in the scenario (S1520). When it is determined that the step counter [B] is the same as the number of steps in the scenario (S1520: Yes), the step counter [B] is set to the number of steps in the scenario (S1521). On the other hand, when it is determined that the step counter [B] does not match the number of steps in the scenario (S1520: No), the step counter [B] is updated by adding 1 to the step counter [B] (S1522).

It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] of the excitation counter 223h is 4 or more (S1523). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is less than 4 (S1523: No), the excitation counter [B] is incremented by 1 (S1524). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1523: Yes), the excitation counter [B] is set to 1 (S1525).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the forward direction (S1519: No), it is determined whether the direction in the scenario is the opposite direction (S1526). If it is determined that the direction in the scenario is not the reverse direction (S1526: No), the process proceeds to S1533.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction in the scenario is the opposite direction (S1526: Yes), the value of the step counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1528).

It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1530). If the value of the excitation counter [B] is not 1 (S1530: No), the excitation counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1531). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1530: Yes), the value of the excitation counter [B] is set to 4 (S1532). After that, the process proceeds to S1533.

In the process of S1533, it is determined whether the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is off and the sensor data in the scenario is on (S1533). When the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is off and the sensor data in the scenario is determined to be on (S1533: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the motor sensor [B] is on (S1533: Yes). S1534). When it is determined that the state of the motor sensor [B] is off (S1534: No), the data corresponding to the excitation counter [B] is set in the excitation data [B] (S1535).

In this way, when the sensor data is turned on in the scenario, the excitation data is set until the sensor corresponding to the motor sensor [B] is turned on, so that the sensor is reliably driven to the position where the sensor is turned on. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to return to the origin position without managing the number of steps and the like, and drive control can be easily performed.

When the operation flag 223o corresponding to the scenario is turned on, the sensor data in the scenario is determined to be off (S1533: No), or the state of the motor sensor [B] is determined to be off. (S1534: Yes), the process of S1536 is executed. In the process of S1536, a process of adding 1 to the variable [B] is executed (S1536). After that, the process returns to the process of S1503, the iterative process is executed, and when it is determined in the process of S1503 that the variable [B] is larger than 4, this process is terminated (S1503: No).

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a correction operation process (S1506), which is one process in the motor command monitoring process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this correction operation monitoring process (S1506). This correction operation monitoring process (S1506) is a process for performing correction when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven and it is difficult to make contact with a predetermined contact surface. Will be executed.

In the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1506), first, the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1601). This variable [B] is for indicating a motor corresponding to the value of the variable [B] as well as the variable [B] used in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311).

It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is equal to or less than the number of motors (4 in this embodiment) (S1602). When it is determined that the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1602: Yes), the rotation drive correction which is the correction scenario stored in the correction scenario storage area [B] in the correction scenario storage area 223f. The scenario table 222c (see FIG. 14 (a)) and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14 (b)) are extracted. Here, the correction scenarios stored in the correction scenario storage area 223f are set in the processes of S1706 and S1707 of the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313) described later, respectively.

1 is added to the value of the excitation timer [B] of the excitation timer 223i (S1604). It is determined whether the excitation timer [B] matches the operating speed in the correction scenario (S1605). When it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the operation speed in the correction scenario match (S1605: Yes), the excitation timer [B] is set to 0 (S1606). After that, the process proceeds to S1607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the excitation timer [B] and the operation speed in the correction scenario do not match (S1605: No), the process of S1607 is executed.

In the process of S1607, it is determined whether the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1607). When it is determined that the excitation timer [B] is 0 (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the direction in the correction scenario is the positive direction (S1608). When it is determined that the direction in the correction scenario is the positive direction (S1608: Yes), the value of the step counter [B] is incremented by 1 (S1609). It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1610). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is less than 4 (S1610: No), 1 is added to the excitation counter [B] (S1611). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 4 or more (S1610: Yes), the excitation counter [B] is set to 1.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is not the forward direction (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is the reverse direction (S1613). When it is determined that the rotation direction set in the correction scenario is the opposite direction (S1613: Yes), the step counter [B] is subtracted by 1. It is determined whether the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1615). When it is determined that the excitation counter [B] is not 1, (S1615: No), the excitation counter [B] is subtracted by 1 (S1617). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter [B] is 1 (S1615: Yes), the value of the excitation counter [B] is set to 4 (S1616). After the processes of S1611, S1612, S1616, and S1617 are executed, the process of S1602 is executed again, and the previous processes are repeated. If it is determined in the process of S1602 that the value of the variable [B] is a value larger than 4, (S1602: No), this process is terminated.

In this correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505), each motor is driven until the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 reaches 75. The maximum value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is set to 200, and when the maximum value is exceeded, the step counter 223j is set to 1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a drive correction process (S1313), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this drive correction process (S1313). This drive correction process (S1313) determines whether the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven and come into contact with each other on a predetermined contact surface, and if they cannot make contact, it is determined. Execute the process for setting the correction scenario for correction.

In the drive correction process (FIG. 32, S1313), first, it is determined whether the values of the step counters 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor are 180 (S1701). When it is determined that the value of the step counter 223j is 180 (S1701: Yes), the value of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is a set value (75 in this embodiment). Is determined.

Here, the position where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven in the contact direction and the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive bodies 910 hold a rotatable interval is the position where the value of the step counter 223j is 180. .. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured so that the value of the step counter 223j makes one revolution at 200, and when the step counter is rotated more than that, the step counter becomes 1. Normally, at the position where the step counter 223j is 180, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 is in a state where the boundary (corner) between the A surface 900a and the B surface 900b faces substantially vertically downward. On the other hand, in the lower rotation drive body 910, when the step counter 223j is at the position of 180, the boundary (corner) between the A surface 910a and the D surface 910d faces substantially vertically upward. From this state, while driving in the direction of contact for each of 20 steps, the upper rotation drive body 900 rotates the display surface so that the B surface 900b faces vertically downward (rotates by about 45 degrees), and drives the lower rotation. The body 910 is rotated (rotated by about 45 degrees) so that the display surface D surface 910d faces vertically upward, and the B surface 900b and the D surface 910d are brought into contact with each other facing each other. By bringing them into contact with each other in this way, the C surfaces 900c and 910c, which are set in advance to face the front when they come into contact with each other, stop in a state of facing the front.

In this way, at the position of the step counter 180, the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 of each other's upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are set values (in this embodiment). By determining whether the value of the step counter 223j is 38), the surfaces (C surfaces 900c and 910c in the present embodiment) that have been set to face the front surface come into contact with each other so as to face the front surface. Can be determined in advance. Therefore, if there is a deviation and the desired surfaces cannot be brought into contact with each other with the desired surfaces facing the front, the correction can be set.

In the process of S1702, when the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 is determined to be a set value (75 in this embodiment) (S1702: Yes), the correction flag 223n is turned off. Set (S1703). On the other hand, when the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913 is determined to be different from the set value (38 in this embodiment) (S1702: No), the correction flag 223o is set to ON (S1702: No). S1704). That is, the correction flag 223o is a flag indicating that it is difficult to bring the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 into contact with each other in predetermined display surfaces.

When it is determined that the correction flag 223o is on (S1705), the rotation drive correction scenario table (top) 222c (FIG. 14 (a)) is a correction scenario for the upper rotation motor 903 (upper rotation drive body 900). Correction) is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. The rotation drive correction scenario table (bottom) 222c, which is a correction scenario for the lower rotation motor 913 (lower rotation drive body 910), is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. It is set (stored) in each of the scenario storage areas 2 (S1706). The vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14C), which is a common correction scenario for the upper drive motor 905 (upper rotation drive body 900) and the lower drive motor 915 (lower rotation drive body 910), is corrected in the correction scenario storage area 223f. Each of the correction scenario storage areas 3 to 4 is set (stored) (S1707).

Here, when it is determined that the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 cannot be brought into contact with each other on a predetermined predetermined surface, the rotation drive correction is a correction scenario set to correct the contact. When the scenario table 222c (see FIG. 14 (a)) and the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f (see FIG. 14 (c)) are set, they are set to be driven and corrected as follows. According to the vertical drive correction scenario table 222f, the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are stopped in the state of the step counter 180 as they are for 8000 ms. On the other hand, according to the rotation drive correction scenario table 222c, the upper rotation motor 903 continues to rotate in the forward direction at a speed of 1 for 8000 ms until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 75. Similarly, the lower rotation motor 913 is rotated in the same manner as the upper rotation motor 903. Here, if only the other side is deviated, only the other side will be rotated.

With this configuration, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be efficiently corrected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are rotated at the same speed for correction, but the correction is not limited to this, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are rotated at different speeds. It may be configured to allow. With this configuration, the deviation of the display surface between the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is eliminated, and when the step counters (75 in the present embodiment) of the set values are obtained, the correction flag 223o Is set to off and drive control is performed based on a normal set scenario to bring the preset display surfaces into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 rotate the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 once each when the value of the step counter 223j reaches 200. Then, when it is rotated further, the value of the step counter 223j is reset to 0, which is the initial value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a motor output process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this motor output process (S1314). This motor output process (S1314) is a motor command monitoring process (s) for the upper rotation motor 903 and the upper drive motor 905 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor 913 and the lower drive motor 915 of the lower rotation drive body 910. The process of outputting the drive data (excitation data) set in the process of FIG. 28, S1312) or the correction operation process (FIG. 31, S1505) is executed.

In the motor output process (FIG. 33b, S1314), first, the variable [B] is set to 1 (S1801). This variable [B] is for indicating the motor corresponding to the value of the variable [B] as well as the variable [B] used in the motor scenario processing (FIG. 27, S1311). It is determined whether the value of the variable [B] is 4 or less (S1802). The excitation data [B] stored in the excitation data storage area 223g is set in the motor [B] (S1803). Here, if the motor 1 is used, the upper rotation motor 903 is used, if the motor 2 is used, the lower rotation motor 913 is used, if the motor 3 is used, the upper drive motor 905 is used, and if the motor 4 is used, the lower drive motor 915 is used. Each corresponds.

1 is added to the variable [B] (S1804), the process returns to the process of S1802, and the process is repeated. In the process of S1802, when it is determined that the value of the variable [B] is a value larger than 4, this process ends. By updating the variable [B] in this way, the data set in the excitation data storage area 223g can be sequentially set for each motor. Therefore, each motor can be driven and controlled more reliably.

Next, the command determination process (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1316). This command determination process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1316), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903).

The received variation pattern type determines whether the motor drive (drive of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910) is set (S1904). As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B, the motor scenario table 222g is used to determine whether or not the motor drive is set in advance for each variation pattern by the rotation drive scenario table 222a (FIG. 13 (a)). ), And the vertical drive scenario table 222d (see FIG. 13C) are set respectively.

When it is determined that the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern (S1904: Yes), the rotation drive scenario table 222a is selected from the motor scenario table 222g based on the received fluctuation pattern, and the scenario is stored. It is stored (stored) in the scenario storage areas 1 and 2 of the area 223e, respectively. Further, based on the received fluctuation pattern, the vertical drive scenario table 222d is selected from the motor scenario table 222g and stored (stored) in the scenario storage areas 3 to 4 of the scenario storage table 223e (S1905). The operation flag 223o is set to off (S1906).

In this way, when the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, each scenario is set, so that the third symbol set for the fluctuation pattern is set. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be easily driven according to the display contents displayed on the display device 81.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1908), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1908), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1910). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1910: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1911). Further, in the process of S1911, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. After the processing of S1911, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning prize is given. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1911. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1911 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1910, if the hold ball number command is not received (S1910: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1912).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation display setting process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1317). This variation display setting process (S1317) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 35, S1317), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2005 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2005). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2005: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S2005: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is turned off (S2006), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2007).

The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009. In the process of S2009, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). ..

In the present embodiment, the values of the step counters 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 are at the position of 180, and the values of the step counters of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 are set values (in this embodiment). , 75), but the determination is not limited to this, and the determination may be performed at any position, and the values of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 corresponding to each position are set and determined. It should be set as follows. Further, it is determined whether the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 correspond to the values of the step counter 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913, respectively, multiple times. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to stably control the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player is notified on a display surface different from the setting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are configured to switch the display surface for notifying the player by rotating, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the lower rotation drive body 910 is configured to be switched by another configuration. Of course it's okay. For example, one display surface may be configured by a liquid crystal display device without rotation, and the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals. Further, the shutter member may be movable at predetermined time intervals to switch the display surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotate at a speed of their choice and approach and separate from each other at the same speed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower rotation drive body 910 rotates with each other. It may be configured to change the speed and the speed of movement.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the rotation positions of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are deviated, the movement of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stopped and the rotation is corrected. However, it may be corrected so as to match by changing the movement speeds of each other or one of them.

In the present embodiment, the correction operation is performed as a dedicated operation and then returned to the normal operation. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and when the correction operation is performed, the time required for the correction operation is performed. By increasing the movement speed based on the above, even if the drive can be completed within the entire drive time set in the scenario table of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the drive of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 from becoming longer than the fluctuation time.

Next, another example of the first embodiment will be described. In the main process (FIG. 26), the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a display surface (upper rotation motor 903 and lower) facing the front side in the storage position of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910. The value of the step counter with the rotation motor 913 or whether the upper rotation sensor 908 and the lower rotation sensor 918 are set to ON) is determined. Then, when it is determined that the display surface is different from the normal state (in the present embodiment, the A surface does not face the front surface), the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven. Set so that it is easy to set.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, a motor scenario table 222g for correction is set separately from the normal motor scenario table, and is selected in response to a variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The ratio of the effect of driving and controlling the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is set to be larger than that of the normal motor scenario table 222g.

By setting in this way, even when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are stored in the storage position with the display surface different from the normal state facing the front side, the speed is faster. The upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven so that the normal display surface can be stored facing the front surface. Therefore, since the display surface different from the normal state of the player is stored facing the front, it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player.

Regarding the drive control set in the motor scenario table 222g for correction, the display surface located on the front side when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 come into contact with each other has the lowest expectation. ? ”. By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being frequently notified of the display surface having a high degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of expectation for an excessive jackpot.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 37. In the above-described first embodiment, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are respectively attached with the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915, respectively, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are attached. The case where the body 910 and the body 910 are driven up and down has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, L-shaped racks facing each other are provided on the left and right sides of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, and are fitted to each other. It was configured to arrange the motors that drive the gears. Further, it is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that sensors for detecting the origin position and the rotation position of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are provided respectively.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36, the right shaft branch 900R of the upper rotation drive body 900 in the second embodiment.
The upper drive motor 905 is not provided on the right protruding piece 900Rb. The right protruding piece 900Rb is formed in an L shape, and is composed of a rack that protrudes horizontally from the right cylindrical portion 900Ra and is bent at a right angle toward the lower rotation drive body 910 side to form a rack gear inward. ing. On the other hand, the lower drive motor 915 is not provided on the right protruding piece 910Ra of the right shaft support portion 910R of the lower rotation drive body 910. The right projecting piece 910Rb is composed of a rack that is L-shaped, projects horizontally from the right cylindrical portion 910Ra, is bent at a right angle toward the upper rotation drive body 900 side, and has a rack gear formed outward. ing. The rack gears of the right protruding piece 900Rb and the right protruding piece 910Rb are arranged so as to face each other, and a right drive gear 700 that fits with each other is arranged between them. The right drive gear 700 is rotated by a stepping motor which is a right drive motor.

Similarly, the left shaft branch 900L is also provided with a left protruding piece 900Rb and a left protruding piece 910Rb having the same configuration, and the right drive gear 710 is fitted and driven by the left drive motor. In this way, by driving (rotating) the right drive motor and the left drive motor in different directions at the same time, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are brought into contact with each other and separated from each other, respectively. It can be driven.

With this configuration, the weight of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be reduced, and the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be easily driven in synchronization with each other, and the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 can be driven vertically.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, a first sensor 900s and a second sensor 900t are provided on the left cylindrical portion 900La of the left shaft support portion 900L of the upper rotation drive body 900, respectively. The first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are composed of transmissive sensors, and are configured to be capable of detecting a detection piece 900n provided so as to project from the left side 900f of the upper rotation drive body 900. .. The first sensor 900s is provided vertically above the inside of the left cylindrical portion 900La, and the second sensor 900t is provided at a position on the front side of the game machine inside the left cylindrical portion 900La. The first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are provided at positions separated by about 1/4 lap.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the detection piece 900n has a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the left cylindrical portion 900La, and is driven upward by being inserted into the left cylindrical portion 900La. The display surface of the body 900 is rotatably supported. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the detection piece 900n has a cylindrical shape on the left side side 900f side, and a detection unit 900n1 is formed at the tip thereof so as to project about 1/4 of the circumference. Has been done. The detection piece 900n is arranged so as to project from the left side 900f so that the position where the first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are turned on is the position where the A side 900a faces the front side, that is, the origin. Further, depending on the state in which the first sensor 900s is on, the state in which only the second sensor 900t is on, and the state in which both the first sensor 900s and the second sensor 900t are off, the display surface of the upper rotation drive body 900 It is configured so that it can be determined at which position. Further, the lower rotation drive body 910 is similarly configured.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment described above, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven to each other and the step counter 223j of the upper drive motor 905 and the lower drive motor 915 reaches a predetermined number of steps, A case has been described in which it is determined whether or not contact is possible on a predetermined contact surface, and if it is difficult to make contact, the correction is performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are driven, which display surface is the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910? It is determined whether the surface is stored with the surface facing the front side, and if the A surfaces 900a and 910a, which are the normal origin positions, are not stored with the surfaces facing the front side, a correction corresponding to the correction is made. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a scenario table is set and control for driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the correction scenario selection table 222i is added to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10).

In the correction scenario selection table 222i, as shown in FIG. 39, 12 patterns of correction scenario patterns from 1 to 12 are set respectively. Each correction scenario pattern is a correction rotation drive scenario for the upper rotation drive body 900 by combining a display surface facing the front in the upper rotation drive body 900 and a display surface facing the front in the lower rotation drive body 910, respectively. A table and a correction rotation drive scenario table for the lower rotation drive body 910 are set respectively. As for the correction rotation drive scenario table, the correction rotation drive scenario tables 1 to 3 are stored in the correction scenario selection table 222i, respectively.

In the corrected rotation drive scenario 1 (see FIG. 40A), the upper rotation drive body 900 is stopped with the B surface 900b facing the front, or the lower rotation drive body 910 faces the D surface 910d to the front. It is selected when it is stopped in the state of. After stopping and waiting for 1500 ms after the start of driving the upper rotation drive body 900, the upper rotation drive body 900 is rotated at a speed of 1 in the forward direction until the value of the step counter 223j reaches 50 for 2500 ms. Set.

In this way, by making the standby time 500 ms longer than usual (rotation drive scenario table 222a (see FIG. 13A) selected when the A side 900a and 910a are in the front), the B side 900b or the D side It can be corrected that the rotation starts from 910d.

Similarly, the correction rotation drive scenario 2 (see FIG. 40B) is selected when the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 is housed with the C surfaces 900c and 910c facing the front. .. In this correction rotation drive scenario 2, the standby time is set to be 1000 ms longer than usual, and it is possible to correct the rotation from the C surfaces 900c and 910c.

In the corrected rotation drive scenario 3 (see FIG. 40 (c)), the upper rotation drive body 900 is stopped with the D surface 900d facing the front, or the lower rotation drive body 910 faces the B surface 910b to the front. It is selected when it is stopped in the state of. In this correction rotation drive scenario 3, the standby time is set to be 1500 ms longer than usual, and it is possible to correct the rotation from the D surface 900c or the B surface 910b.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display surface can be rotated once in 2000 ms by driving the upper rotation motor 903 or the lower rotation motor 913 at a speed of 1. Therefore, it is possible to rotate in 500 ms from one display surface to the next display surface. Therefore, if the display surface is deviated to the next surface, the other is to wait for 500 ms. It can be combined with the driving body of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display surface is configured to be adjusted normally by waiting according to the deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface may be set to be adjusted by changing the speed. Further, the vertical movement of both driving bodies may be made to stand by in the rotation allowable region for a predetermined period, and during that time, the driving bodies may be driven so as to align the positions of both display surfaces for correction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process (FIG. 41) of the third embodiment, the contents of the motor command monitoring process (S1312) and the command determination process (S1316) are changed from the main process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. The drive correction process (S1313) has been deleted. Since the other processes are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the motor command monitoring process (S1312), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this motor command monitoring process (S1312). In the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 42, S1312) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1504 to S1506 are deleted from the motor command monitoring process (FIG. 42, S1312) of the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S1316), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1316). In the command determination process (FIG. 43, S1316) of the third embodiment, each process from S1920 to S1921 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S1316) of the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the motor drive is set for the received fluctuation pattern (S1904: Yes), the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor of the lower rotation drive body 900. It is determined whether the step counter 223j with the 913 has a normal value (in the present embodiment, the values of the step counters 223j are 0 each other) (S1920). When it is determined that the step counters 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 and the lower rotation motor 913 have normal values, the process of S1905 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not normal (S1920: No), the vertical drive scenario table 222e is set in the scenario storage areas 3 to 4 of the scenario storage area 223e from the motor scenario table 222g based on the fluctuation pattern (memory). ). Further, based on the values of the step counters 223j of the upper rotation motor 903 of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation motor 913 of the lower rotation drive body 910, the display surfaces facing the front side are determined respectively, and the correction scenario The rotation drive scenario table is selected from the selection table 222i and set in the scenario storage areas 1 and 2 of the scenario storage area 223e (S1921).

In this way, before driving the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910, the state of each drive body is determined, and a scenario table suitable for the state is set to display a predetermined value. Drive control can be easily performed so that the surfaces come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the next fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the middle of the drive control process due to the processing failure of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the display surface different from the normal one is displayed on the front surface. Even when the display surfaces are stored in the storage position on the side, the regular display surfaces can be brought into contact with each other to be driven. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the predetermined notification mode by bringing the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 900 into contact with each other with a predetermined display surface facing the front. it can.

In the present embodiment, only the case where the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 are brought into contact with each other with the C surfaces 900c and 910c facing the front has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In practice, the variation pattern presets the surfaces that come into contact with the front surface. Therefore, the variation pattern selected drives the various surfaces to come into contact with each other toward the front side. Therefore, the player can enjoy by combining the notification content notified by the display surfaces of the upper rotation drive body 900 and the lower rotation drive body 910 with the display mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81. it can.

In the present embodiment, the display surface facing the front side of the upper rotation drive body 900 or the lower rotation drive body 910 at the storage position is a predetermined display surface (in the present embodiment, the A surface 900, 910a). The corrected rotation drive scenario table executed when the case is different from) is set so as to make the timing of starting rotation different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the speed of approaching each other may be changed. Specifically, the moving speed of the driving body in which the deviation occurs is set to be faster, the rotation position is corrected in the rotation allowable region, and then the driving body is driven in accordance with the speed of the other driving body. You may. With this configuration, the deviation of the display surface can be easily corrected.

The contents described in the first to third embodiments may be combined.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by being displaced, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means includes the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When moving the above, the two are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movably controlled so as to be positioned on the front side of each other, and the approaching is performed by the movable control means. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the positional direction, the first movable means and the second movable means are each set to the predetermined display surface. The position determining means for determining whether or not the approaching position can be reached while the is located on the front side, and the movable control means when the position determining means determines that the approaching position is unreachable. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a correction control means for executing a correction movable control for correcting the predetermined display surface so as to face the front side at an approaching position.

According to the game machine A1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable. Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

In the game machine A1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. 2. A displacement permissible region that allows displacement with the movable means is set, and a position at which the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced is provided in the displacement permissible region. The game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the correction movable control interrupts the first movable means and the second movable means from moving toward each other in the approaching position direction, and causes the first movable means and the second movable means to move. After the means is displaced at the approaching position until the correction completed state in which the predetermined display surface is located on the front side, the first movable means is subjected to the same movable control as the normal movable control. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the second movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1 or A2, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having a movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by displacing it, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means places the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When they are moved, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movably controlled so as to be positioned on the front side of each other. When moving from the first to the approaching position, it is determined whether the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position are predetermined display surfaces. When the state determination means and the state determination means determine that the display surface is different from the predetermined display surface, the movable control means is approached to the movable control means at the approach position based on the display surface facing the front side. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a correction control means for selecting and executing a correction movable control for correcting so that a predetermined display surface faces the front side.

According to the game machine B1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable. Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

In the game machine B1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. 2 Displacement allowable areas that allow displacement with the movable means are set, and the respective correction movable controls are within the displacement allowable area corresponding to each display surface located on the front side at the separated position. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the timing at which the first movable means and the second movable means are started to be displaced after being moved to a different position is set differently.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.

In the game machine B1, a displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, the first movable means, and the first movable means. A displacement allowable area that allows displacement with the two movable means is set, and each of the corrected movable controls can be moved to the approaching position corresponding to each display surface located on the front side at the separated position. A game machine B3 characterized in that each speed is set differently.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

A first movable means configured to be movable, a second movable means configured to be movable at least in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means, and at least the first movable means and the second movable means. In a gaming machine having movable control means for movably controlling the movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other, the first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of displays. It has a surface, and by being displaced, each display surface can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means includes the first movable means and the second movable means at the approaching position. When moving the above, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced, and at the approaching position, the predetermined display surfaces are movablely controlled so as to be located on the front side of each other. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, By a state determining means for determining whether each of the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position is a predetermined display surface, and the state determining means. It has a movable frequency changing means for setting the first movable means and the second movable means to a state in which the movable means is more easily controlled than the normal state when it is determined that the display surface is different from the predetermined display surface. A game machine C1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position that approaches each other and a separation position that separates from each other. The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the state determining means determines whether the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means facing the front side at the separated position are predetermined display surfaces. When the state determining means determines that the display surface is different from the display surface, the first movable means and the second movable means are set to a special state in which the movable means is more easily controlled than the normal state by the movable frequency changing means. In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, if the display surface facing the front side when starting to move at the separated position is different from the normal state, it is more movable than in the normal state. Since it is easily moved by the control means, it can be easily returned to the normal state again. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.

The game machine C1 has an effect determining means for determining an effect mode related to a game from an effect group composed of a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode group includes the first movable means and the second movable means. A movable effect mode set to move the movable means from the separated position to the approaching position is included, and the movable effect mode is selected more than usual in the movable frequency changing means. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is set to be.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect mode related to the game is determined by the effect determination means means from the effect mode group composed of a plurality of effect modes. The effect mode group includes a movable effect mode in which the first movable means and the second movable means are set to be moved from a separated position to an approached position. It is set by the movable frequency changing means so that the movable effect mode is selected more than usual. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural feeling and to make it easier to select the movable effect mode.

In the game machine C1 or C2, in a state where the state determination means determines that a display surface different from the predetermined display surface is facing the front side, the movable control means approaches the distance position. When it is movable with respect to a position, it is corrected so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side at the approaching position with respect to the movable control means based on the display surface facing the front side. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by having a correction control means for selecting and executing correction movable control.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effect is played. That is, when the state determining means determines that the display surface different from the predetermined display surface is facing the front side, and the movable control means moves the display surface from the separated position to the approaching position. , Based on the display surface facing the front side, the correction movable control is selected and executed by the correction control means to correct so that the display surface predetermined at the close position to the movable control means faces the front side. .. Therefore, by moving the first movable means and the second movable means, there is an effect that the display surfaces of the first movable means and the second movable means can be set in a normal direction at a separated position.

A gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A game machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a game machine that executes a game effect by driving a plurality of driving objects and joining them to each other has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200382).
In this type of gaming machine, when a plurality of driven objects are joined at a predetermined position, there is a problem that it is difficult to join the driven objects at a predetermined position due to a deviation in the position where the driven objects are started to be driven.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of more stably controlling a driving object.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is configured to be movable at least in a direction in which the first movable means is movable and a direction in which the first movable means is approached and separated from the first movable means. It has a second movable means, and at least a movable control means for movably controlling between an approaching position in which the first movable means and the second movable means are close to each other and a separation position in which the second movable means is separated from each other. The movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the movable control means approaches the approach. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to a position, they are moved closer to each other while being displaced so that predetermined display surfaces are positioned on the front side of each other at the approaching position. It is controlled, and when the movable control means moves in the approaching position direction and the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions, the first movable means and the said The position determining means for determining whether the second movable means can reach the approaching position with the predetermined display surface positioned on the front side, and the position determining means cannot reach the approaching position. It has a correction control means for executing a correction movable control for correcting the movable control means so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side at the approaching position when the determination is made.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means from the separated position to a predetermined position in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. A displacement restricting area in which is arranged and a displacement allowable area that allows displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means are set, and the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced, respectively. The position is provided in the displacement allowable region.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the correction movable control causes the first movable means and the second movable means to move in the approaching position direction to each other. Is interrupted, and the first movable means and the second movable means are displaced at the approaching position until the predetermined display surface is located on the front side, and then the correction is completed. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the same movable control as the normal movable control.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the second movable means is configured to be at least movable in the direction of approaching and away from the first movable means configured to be movable. The first movable means and the second movable means are movably controlled by the movable control means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other.
The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the respective display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine. When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced so that the predetermined display surfaces are located on the front side of each other at the approaching position. Is movable and controlled by. When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are predetermined respectively. The position determining means determines whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the display surface positioned on the front side. When it is determined by the position determination means that it is unreachable, the correction control means executes a correction movable control that corrects the display surface predetermined at the approaching position so that the display surface faces the front side. Will be done.
In this way, when the movable means that approach each other while being displaced from each other are movably controlled, even if it is difficult to position the movable means in the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side, the determination is made and the correction movable Since the control is executed, the display surface can be moved to the approaching position with the predetermined display surface on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the driving object can be executed more stably.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the displacement between the displacement regulating region where the displacement regulating member for regulating the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to the predetermined position, and the displacement between the first movable means and the second movable means. The allowable displacement area is set. Positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. Therefore, there is an effect that the display surface to be located on the front side in the approaching position can be easily determined from the displaced state.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first movable means and the second movable means are interrupted to move in the approaching position direction, and the first movable means and the second movable means are in the closest position, and the predetermined display surface is on the front side. After each of them is displaced until the correction complete state is reached, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position by the movable control by the same movable control as the normal movable control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the predetermined display surface moves to an approaching position before it is located on the front side. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable control can be performed more reliably.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
900 Upper rotation drive body ( part of movable means, example of first movable means)
910 Lower rotation drive body ( part of movable means, example of second movable means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of movable control means )

Claims (3)

The first movable means configured to be movable and
A second movable means configured to be at least movable in a direction approaching and away from the first movable means,
In a gaming machine having at least a movable control means for movably controlling the first movable means and the second movable means between an approaching position approaching each other and a separating position away from each other.
The first movable means and the second movable means have a plurality of display surfaces, and by being displaced, the display surfaces can be arranged on the front side of the game machine.
When the first movable means and the second movable means are moved to the approaching position, the movable control means is brought close to each other while being displaced, and the predetermined display surfaces are brought close to each other at the approaching position. It is movable and controlled so that it is located on the front side.
When the first movable means and the second movable means reach displaceable positions by being moved in the approaching position direction by the movable control means, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved. A position determining means for determining whether or not the approaching position can be reached with the predetermined display surface positioned on the front side, respectively.
When it is determined by the position determining means that it is unreachable, the movable control means is made to execute a correction movable control for correcting so that the predetermined display surface faces the front side at the approaching position. A gaming machine characterized by having a correction control means. A displacement regulating region in which a displacement regulating member that regulates the displacement of at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is arranged from the separated position to a predetermined position, and the first movable means and the second movable means. A displacement allowable area that allows displacement is set, and
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the positions where the first movable means and the second movable means can be displaced are provided in the displacement allowable region. The correction movable control interrupts the first movable means and the second movable means from moving in the approaching position direction, and causes the first movable means and the second movable means to move at the approaching position. After the predetermined display surface is displaced until the correction is completed so that it is located on the front side, the first movable means and the second movable means are subjected to the same movable control as the normal movable control. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the machine is movable to the approaching position.

Images